Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The scope of work under this Contract comprises the construction, completion,
commissioning, handover and maintenance of works related to the Prototype
Immigration Buildings.
B.
The works mainly comprises of the following but not limited to:
1)
2)
New building having four floors (Basement floor, Ground floor, First floor
and second floor). Construction includes structural works, architectural
finishes and electro-mechanical works.
External Works Includes soft and hard landscaping, storm water, fresh
water, drainage and electrical networks.
C.
1.03
A.
The Contractor shall not use the site for any purpose other than carrying out
the works.
B.
C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
1.01
SITE SURVEY
Before commencing operations, the Contractor shall carry out a site survey in the
presence of the Engineer and shall prepare and agree with the Engineer a survey
drawing at the scale required by the Engineer. The survey drawing shall show the
proposed layout of the Permanent Works in relation to boundaries, bench marks and
a grid of the existing ground levels at ten (10) meter centers each way for the whole
area of the site. Distribute copy of the drawing to the Engineer and retain one copy
permanently on site.
1.02
BENCH MARKS
The Contractor shall accurately and safely establish, maintain and clear away upon
completion of the Work site bench marks in accordance with the requirements and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such bench marks shall be related to the nearest
Permanent Bench Mark fixed by the Municipality. The location and reduced value of
the bench marks shall be shown on the site survey drawing. The contractor shall
resurvey and replace to approval, permanent bench marks which are destroyed in
the execution of the Work.
1.03
SETTING OUT
After the Contractor is handed over the Contract Drawings and after taking over all
the existing Permanent Bench Marks, he shall carry out at his own responsibility and
expense the setting out of the work, definitions of levels and setting out lines, axes
and slopes, all in accordance with the Drawings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work in
relation to original points, lines and levels of references given in the Drawings and for
the accuracy of the positions, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts of the
work, and for any delay or loss resulting from errors made in completing the setting
out of the work. The Contractor shall protect, preserve and be responsible for all
existing Bench marks, pegs and boundary marks and shall keep them in place or
replace them when necessary or as directed by the Engineer either in their original
positions or in some other approved positions.
Setting out shall be approved by the Engineer before commencing the works, but
such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
correct execution of the work.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01050-1
FIELD ENGINEERING
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01200
PROJECT SCHEDULE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
1.01
A.
B.
2)
3)
4)
5)
Summary Schedule
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.02. GENERAL
A.
The Construction Program submitted with the Contractors Tender shall depict
in general the key activities and milestones and the duration allotted for the
same. The Contractor shall be required to plan, perform and coordinate his
works with that of other Direct Contractors to meet the overall time
requirements of the Project.
B.
The Contractor shall be required to plan perform and coordinate his works
and those of his sub-contractors with that of all other directly employed
contractors and nominated sub-contractors on the site to meet the time
requirements of the Project including the contract specified milestone date(s)
and construction completion date.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 1
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting adequate planning data for
the development and maintenance of the Contractors Construction
Schedule(s), all to the approval of the Engineer s Representative as detailed
hereinafter
1.
The work under this Section consists of the planning scheduling cost
reporting and reporting procedures required to be carried out by the
Contractor in conjunction with the progress of the Works. The work
shall fulfill all Contract requirements and shall include, but is not
limited to the following-:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Revisions to
Schedule.
f.
approved
Contractors
CPM
Construction
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 2
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
1.03
CONTRACTORS SCHEDULER
A.
Upon signing the Contract, the Contractor shall designate in writing for the
approval of Engineer a qualified Scheduler either in-house or from a
recognized specialist company, who will be responsible for the content
development, and updating of the Contractors schedule(s).
B.
Intermediate Schedule
Within fourteen (14) days from the date of enterprise, the contractor shall
develop and submit an intermediate schedule in bar chart format indicating
the contractors proposed work program for the initial three months of the
project. The schedule shall be of adequate detail to indicate all elements of
construction as well as shop drawings submittals, permits, material deliveries
and other procurement work items. The approved intermediate schedule shall
be used to plan and monitor progress until the Contractors CPM Construction
Schedule is approved. The intermediate schedule shall be updated monthly to
provide a three (3) month schedule beyond the date of updating until the
intermediate schedule is replaced by the approved Contractors CPM
Construction Schedule.
C.
2.
3.
4.
The CPM schedule shall comply with Kuwait Labour Law in so far as
hours of work, days of work, etc.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 3
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
D.
Supporting Data
The Contractor shall submit the under mentioned supporting data with the
submittal of his CPM Construction Schedule. Any changes in this information
shall be submitted with successive updates and revisions.
E.
1.
The proposed number of working days per week (maximum six days
unless approved otherwise by the Engineer).
2.
3.
The planned number of shifts per day (one shift unless approved
otherwise by the Engineer).
4.
The number of hours per shift (maximum eight hours unless approved
otherwise by the Engineer).
5.
6.
7.
8.
Activity Details
The Contractor shall provide as a minimum the following schedule information
for each activity:
Activity identifier(s)
Activity precedent activity
Activity description
Area of work codes
Trade codes
Related actual quantity of work
Responsibility of work code (Sub-Contractors designated etc)
Activity duration (original)
Activity duration (remaining)
%Completion
Early start date
Late start date
Late finish date
Actual Start (when applicable)
Actual Finish (when applicable)
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 4
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
Activity float time
Critical activity identification
F.
Reports
The Contractor shall also provide the following schedule reports:
G.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Schedule by responsibility
Summary Schedule
The Contractor shall submit along with his CPM Construction Schedule a
Summary Schedule in bar chart format depicting the major elements of
construction. The Summary Schedule shall summarize the various activities
contained in the CPM Construction Schedule into the major elements of
construction and the interrelationship of these major elements as welt as their
relationship to work within the Project Schedule performed by others as well
as the key milestone dates. The Summary Schedule shall be modified to
reflect the approved CPM Construction Schedule and issued with the
approved CPM Construction Schedule. The Summary Schedule shall be
revised and re-issued whenever there are revisions to the logic of the
approved CPM Construction Schedule or approved revisions to the specified
milestone dates arid completion date.
H.
I.
One (1) complete blue line set of diagrams from the last approved
Contractors Construction Schedule, marked-up in red showing all
revisions and changes in accordance with the monthly meeting, and s
by the Contractor.
2.
Three blue line prints of each diagram and three copies of the
scheduling reports.
3.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 5
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
J.
4.
5.
1.04
SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE
OF
VALUES
AND
COST
LOADED
CONSTRUCTION
A.
Within seven (7) days of obtaining approval of his Construction Schedule the
Contractor shall submit for the Engineers Representatives approval a Cost
Loaded Construction Schedule with a fully detailed Schedule of values and all
necessary supporting details of all activities in the Contractors Cost Loaded
Construction Schedule, based upon the Rates and Bills of Quantities, and the
total shall equal the Contract price.
B.
C.
1.05
A.
Job site progress meetings will be held twice each month at which time the
Contractor schedule(s) will be reviewed and updated. Those attending this
meeting shall include the Engineers Represented, and authorized
representatives of the Contractor, Sub s and other Contractors as required. At
the alternate meet which occurs immediately before the agreed payment cutoff
date, the Contractor shall have his copy of the Cost Loaded Construct Schedule
and all other data required by the Contract Documents accurately filled in and
completed prior to this meeting. Work Progress and the construction schedule(s)
will be reviewed to verify:
1.
2.
3.
When the schedule does not represent the actual execution and
progress of the works a being performed in the field.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 6
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
B.
1.06
A.
1.07
SCHEDULING SYSTEM
The Contractor shall utilize the latest version of Primavera a computerized
scheduling software system or any other approved software requested by the
Engineer.
1.08
PROVIDING INFORMATION
The Contractor shall provide the Engineers Representative with copies of
data information of the approved Contractors CPM Construction Schedule
and Construction Schedule. The information to be provided on data diskettes
compatible for use on the Engineers computer system.
1.09
A.
Definition: The term product shall mean any material including proprietary
goods, equipment and manufactured items.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 7
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
not better than the quality, durability and performance characteristics of the
specified product.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 8
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
1.10
ALLOWANCES
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01200- 9
Gen. Reqmts.Project Schedule &
Payment Procedures
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - 01312
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section includes Administrative and Supervisory requirements necessary for cocoordinating construction operation including, but not necessarily limited to the
followings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
The requirements of the above Sections do not supersede or take precedence over
any provision of the Tendering Procedure Doc-1 and Conditions of Contract Doc-2.
Should any discrepancy become apparent among those documents, the contractor
shall notify the Engineer in writing, and the Engineer shall interpret and decide such
mattes in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Contract. In this regard
Engineers decision shall be considered as final/
1.03
COORDINATION
A.
B.
C.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01312-1
COORDINATION & MEETINGS
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring within the construction. Coordinate
locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E.
F.
Coordinate with other Contractor(s) employed by the Employer, for all activities
interfacing or interfering with this work, in particular on the common boundary limits.
G.
1.04
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Employer and Engineer will schedule a conference after Contractor has selected his
major sub-trades and prior to signing of Employer/Contractor Agreement.
B.
C.
Agenda:
1.
Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedules of values and
progress schedule.
2.
Designation of responsible personnel and manpower organization.
3.
Procedures and processing of field decisions shop drawings, submittals,
substitutions, applications for payments, proposal requests, variations,
checklists and Contract closeout procedures.
4.
Scheduling and sequence of work.
5.
Use of premises by Employer and Contractor.
6.
Employers requirements.
1.05
A.
Engineer and Employer will schedule a conference at the Project Site prior to
Contractor occupancy.
B.
C.
Agenda:
1.
Use of premises by Employer and Contractor
2.
Employers requirements
3.
Construction facilities and controls provided by Contractor
4.
Temporary Utilities provided by Contractor
5.
Survey and Building layout
6.
Security and housekeeping procedures
7.
Schedules
8.
Procedures for testing
9.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
10.
Requirements for start-up of equipment
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01312-2
COORDINATION & MEETINGS
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
11.
12.
1.06
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
B.
The Engineer should prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to
participants, three days in advance of meeting date.
C.
The Engineer will preside at meetings. Record minutes and distributes copies
within two days after meeting to participants, to entities affected by decisions
at meetings, with two copies to each of Engineer and Employer.
D.
E.
F.
Minimum Agenda:
1.
Approval of minutes of previous meetings.
2.
Review of Work progress and CPM program.
3.
Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4.
Identification of problems, which impede planned progress.
5.
Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6.
Review of off-site fabrication and deliver schedules.
7.
Maintenance of progress schedule.
8.
Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9.
Planned progress during succeeding works period.
10.
Coordination of projected progress.
11.
Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13.
Safety.
14.
Contractors Resources: Management, Men, Money, Materials, and
Machinery.
15.
Contractors on-site staff progress report.
16.
Contractors Employers and Engineers Office Managements
observations and remarks.
17.
Other business relating to work.
18.
Samples and mock-ups as required by the Engineer or the Employer
before execution of the work.
G.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01312-3
COORDINATION & MEETINGS
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
1.07
PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within
two days after conference to participants with two copies to Engineer.
E.
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01312-4
COORDINATION & MEETINGS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01323
CPM SCHEDULES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the Critical Path
Method (CPM) of scheduling and reporting progress of the work
1,
Refer to the Conditions of Contract for definitions and specific dates of Contract
Time.
2. The work under this clause consists of the scheduling and reporting procedures
required to be carried out by the Contractor in junction with the progress of the
report.
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this
section.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.
1.02
A.
DEFINATIONS
Critical Path Method (CPM) : A method of planning and scheduling a construction
project where Activities are arranged based on activity relationships and network
calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of the
Project.
B.
C.
D.
Critical Path : The longest continuous chain of activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall project duration.
E.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-1
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling,
monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a
constructive schedule consume time and resources.
1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path.
2. Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given
activity can be started.
G.
H.
I.
1.03
A.
B.
B.
The construction schedule shall be updated monthly and when required by the
Engineer's Representative Construction Manager at joint meetings with the
Engineers. Representative, Construction Manager, the Contractor, Subcontractors
and other direct contractors who may be required to attend.
D.
Failure of the contractors to comply with the requirements of those sections shall be
Grounds for recommendations by the engineer that no further progress payment
shall be made until the contractor is in compliance.
E.
Each revision of the construction schedule shall be signed by the duly authorized
representative of the Contractor and these documents, upon approval by the
engineer, shall thereupon become incorporated in to the contract documents of the
project.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-2
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractors Representation:
The Contractor shall designate a Scheduling
Engineer who shall be responsible for the content and development of the
Contractors Construction Schedule. This representative shall have direct control
and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in fulfilling the
requirements and such authority shall not be interrupted throughout the duration of
the contract.
B.
Qualified Schedule Engineer with ten (10) years and in compliance with
requirements of Contract Documents.
1.05
A.
B.
C.
Within 30 days of the Date of Notice, you proceed the contractor shall submit for
Construction Manager approval, the construction schedule in a bar-chart-timeScaled format, to show the sequence and interdependence of activities required
for complete performance of all items of work under the contract or portion
thereof.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-3
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Further this schedule shall reflect the milestone required by the contract
documents in preparing the construction schedule, the Contractor shall :
1. Exercise care to produce a clear, legible, and accurate diagram.
Activities related to specific areas of the project shall be grouped on the
diagram for ease, understanding, and simplification. The diagram shall show
the following for each construction activity, where applicable.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2. Include any trade or material restrains to indicate the movement of trades who
are performing major work.
3. Should the contractors schedule software allow open ends to be shown,
critical or not critical will be adopted .
At monthly intervals the Contractor shall submit for the Engineers review, e detailed
schedule developed from approved construction Schedule, covering a period
the of the next 90 days and relating the contractors daily work activities.
E.
Every 2 weeks the contractor shall submit for the Engineers review, e detailed
Schedule covering the next 15 days activities.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-4
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
F.
The contractor shall submit the under mentioned supporting data with the submittal of
his construction schedule and any successive updates and revisions in an approved
format by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G. Failure to include any element of the works required for the performance of the
Contact shall not excuse the contractor from completing all work required within
any applicable competition date of each phase or the whole of the project,
notwithstanding the Engineer's Representative's approval of the Construction
Schedule.
1.06
COST LOADING
A.
Within seven (7) days of obtaining approval of the Construction Schedule, the
Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval a cost loaded construction
Schedule with a fully detailed schedule of values and all necessary supporting
details of all activities in the cost loaded construction schedule based upon the
priced Bills of Quantities (Document III-4) and the total shall equal the contract
price.
B.
The approved cost loaded Construction Schedule shall be the basis for calculating
progress payments pro-rata to the work performed.
C.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-5
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.07
A.
The Contractor shall submit an updated Construction Schedule when the monthly
payment is due.
B.
1.08
A.
The contract duration will be adjusted only in accordance with the provisions of
Document II. In the event, the Contractor requests adjustments of the contract
duration, he shall furnish such justification and supporting data as the Engineer as
to whether or not the contractor will be entitled to an extension of tie for
completion. Submission of proof based on revised activity, logic, duration and
costs is obligatory with any request.
B.
The contractor shall submit with every request, his revised construction schedule
whenever the actual field progress of the work does not confirm to the latest
approved construction schedule in force at the time of the alleged delay.
C.
The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of a request for
extension of time, advise the contractor of his decision.
When the Engineer has not yet made a decision as to any extension of time, and
The parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment to be reflected
in the construction programme, and should the contractor choose to reflect the
requested amount of time adjustment in this construction schedule, he will do so at
his own risk. Such reflection of time adjustment shall only serve the purpose of
monitoring the schedule of the works until such time as the employer has made the
final determination as to any extension time. The contractor will revise his
construction schedule thereafter in accordance with the Engineer's decision and
act and perform the works accordingly.
E.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-6
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.09
A.
SCHEDULING SYSTEM
The Engineer has established Primavera Project Manger Engineering and
Construction Software for windows (P3 E/C) as the standard scheduling
application for this project.
The latest version of this software shall be used to develop all CPM construction
schedules. The construction schedules information and supported data to be
provided on compact disc compatible for use by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representatives computer system.
1.10
SUBMITTALS
A.
All Construction Schedule submittals including revisions and updates, shall consist
three (3) copies of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Complete blue line set of diagram from the last approved construction
Schedule marked up in red showing all revision and changes in
accordance with the monthly meeting and signed by the contractor.
Blue line prints of each diagram and with copies of scheduling reports.
Copies of supporting data.
Back-up copies of Compact Disc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01323
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01323-7
CPM SCHEDULES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Submittal Procedures.
2.
Construction Program Reports
3.
Proposed Product List
4.
Change of Durations
5.
Quality Assurance Submittals
6.
Site Layout, Site Staff Organization Charts and Method Statement
7.
Cash Flow Statements
8.
Digital Record
9.
Engineer & Engineer's Representative Action
B.
1.02
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
3.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-1
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
c. No extension of Time for Completion will be authorized because of
failure to transmit submittals to the Engineer's Representative
sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
B.
C.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-2
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
Submittal of Correspondence:
1.
F.
Within 10 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor should meet with the
Engineer's Representative to explain the requirements and contents of the
Contractor Submittal Log.
1.
Within 21 days from the Date of Enterprise, the Contractor to submit his
Submittals Log, listing all the items requiring the Engineer's
Representative approval as per the Contract Documents, for the
Engineer's Representative initial review.
2.
Within ten (10) days after the Engineer's Representative approval of the
Contractor's Construction Schedule, resubmit the Contractor; Submittals
Log, for the Engineer's Representative's review and approval, after
inserting all particular dates and data from approved schedule.
3.
4.
5.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
G.
1.03
A.
3.
Profession
Average Number
Average working days
Average working hours
Total man-hours
Total man-days
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
4.
5.
Daily Report: Submit this report on daily basis. The report shall describe
the labour force and its allocation, material, equipment utilized and
describe the work in progress during the day.
Utilize Daily Report format as provided by the Engineer's Representative
and as approved by the Engineer.
1.04
A.
Within 30 days after date of Date of Enterprise, submit list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name and model number of
each product.
B.
1.05
CHANGE OF DURATIONS
A,
The Engineer may change any of the durations (other than the Contract Period)
mentioned in this section if he considers the change to be in the interest of the
Contract.
1.06
A.
B.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificates:
1.
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers
certificate to Engineer's Representative for review, in quantities specified
for Product Data.
2.
Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified
requirements.
Submit supporting reference, data, affidavits and certifications as
appropriate.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-5
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
3.
1.07
A.
B.
Location of Contractor's Facilities: The layout of the Contractor's site offices and
storage areas is subject to the approval of the Engineer's Representative.
C.
2.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-6
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
D.
Phasing of Works
Project Organization
Schedule Planning
Temporary Facilities
Resources allocation and leveling (Labour, Equipment and Material)
Quality Assurance /Quality Control Program
Accident Prevention and Safety Program
E.
F.
Project Safety Programme: Within 30 days of the Date of Enterprise and before
commencement of construction activity on site, the Contractor shall submit a
detailed Project Safety Programme. The Safety Programme to include as in
the following:
1.
Name and credentials of Site Safety Officer
2.
Fire Protection and Prevention Plan
3.
Accident Prevention Plan
4.
First Aid Plan
5.
Laborers Education Plan
6.
Special job safety measures specifically for the contract for approval by the
Engineer.
1.08
A.
From the Date of Enterprise the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer's
Representative monthly cash flow estimate covering the period from the Date of
Enterprise to end of the defects Liability Period. Monthly cash flows estimates
shall show net figures after deduction of retention and shall compare actual
against estimated cash flows as work progresses.
1.09
DIGITAL RECORD
A.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-7
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
B.
On a monthly basis until substantial completion, the Contractor shall deliver to the
Engineer's Representative three (3) sets of the complete updated digital record
database.
Three (3) copies of the necessary software for accessing and reading the
material shall delivered with the first month's submittal. One set shall be for the
Employer, and two sets for the Engineer's Representative.
1.10
A.
Except for submittals for the record or information, where action and return is
the Engineer's Representative will review each submittal, marked to indicate
action taken, and return promptly, compatible with the requirements of the review,
generally in fourteen (140) calendar days but in less time when a request for this
has been accepted by the Engineer's Representative or more time when that is
unavoidable in the Engineer's Representative's opinion.
B.
C.
D.
Action Stamp
1.
Each submittal will be returned to the Contractor stamped or marked by
the Engineer's Representative indicating the appropriate action as follow:
Action "A"
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-8
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
Action "B"
Action"C"
2.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of his works
irrespective of approval by the Engineer's Representative and shall pay all
costs and expenses incurred by other Contractors, if any, due to improper
location of his works.
3.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION 01330
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01330-9
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
( )
______________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01333
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Shop Drawings, Record Document and As-Built Drawings include, but are not
limited to the following:
1.
Fabrication drawings.
2.
Installation drawings
3.
Setting diagrams
4.
Shop work manufacturing instructions
5.
Templates and patterns
Drawings prepared with standard information without specific reference to the Works
will not be approved as Shop Drawings, Record Document and As-Built
Drawings.
C.
Quality control submittals include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Design data
1.02
DEFINATIONS
A.
"Shop Drawings" shall establish actual plans, section and details of all
Construction assembled, manufactured or fabricated items, indicate proper
relation to adjoining work , amplify design details whether or not included in
contract drawings of all work including but not limited to civil, architectural,
interiors, mechanical, electrical and site works in proper relation to physical
spaces and incorporate minor changes of design of construction to suit actual
conditions at no additional cost.
B.
C.
"Record Documents" are a record of the works actually installed as the work
progresses including records of all changes and deviation from the Contract
Documents.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-1
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
1.03
A.
Drawings For approval, every time four (4) paper prints of each Shop
Drawings As-Built Drawings and Record Documents with transmittal forms to
the Engineer's Representative.
B.
Drawings After approval, for record and distribution: Three (3) paper prints
to the Engineer's Representative and more to all concerned sub-contractors
as necessary.
1.04
A.
Should the Contractor be required to carry out any design, then design layout
provided shall be for the purpose of general guidance. The Contractor is
required to submit full design shop drawings, complete with calculations,
catalogues,etc for the Engineer's Representative scrutiny and approval
before ordering materials or proceeding with the work on site.
1.05
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-2
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
In the event any one of the other Contractors employed or to be
employed by the Employer is not on board in a timely manner, then
coordination is to be done based design drawings made available by
the Engineers Representative. The Engineer's Representative will not
accept any shop drawing without this necessary coordination step
having been completed.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-3
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
11.
12.
13.
1.06
RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
The Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda ,written amendments, variation/change
orders and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and indexed
and annotated to show all changes made to the works during the construction.
C. These record documents together with all approved samples and a counterpart
of all approved shop drawings will be available to the Engineer's
Representative/ Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Works, these
record documents, samples and shop drawings will be delivered to the
Engineer's Representative for Employer's record.
D.
After the Contractor has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents,
all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds,
certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up
record documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for
Substantial Completion Payment Application.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-4
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
1.07
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall prepare and furnish for the approval of the Engineer's
Representative accurate as built drawings incorporating the latest
amendments (Variations/Changes/Deviations) to the Contract Drawings.
B.
The As-Built Drawings shall show the works as executed complete with
existing and finished levels and all other things necessary to form an accurate
pictorial record of the finished work.
C.
Prior to the preparation of as built drawings the Contractor shall obtain the
Approval of the Engineer's Representative as to the size of drawings, method
of drawing and other relevant details.
D.
All As-Built Drawings shall be numbered and shall have a number series
approved by the Engineer's Representative. A drawing index shall be provided.
E.
The Contractor shall submit and resubmit till final approval by the Engineer's
Representative: four number of copies during each submittal.
F.
1.08
A.
B.
C.
D.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information specific to this
Contract.
E.
Study the Manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents, to combine the two
to produce the most stringent requirements to form the basis of contract price,
execution method, material and time.
F.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-5
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
G.
H.
I.
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction of
system. Mark each copy t show with choices and options are applicable to the
Works.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.09
SAMPLES
A.
Submit full size, fully fabricated samples, cured and finished in the manner
specified, and physically identical with the material or product proposed for use.
1.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-6
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
2.
B.
For review of kind, colour, pattern and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these
characteristics between the submittal and the actual component as
delivered and installed:
a.
b.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.10
DESIGN DATA
A.
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-7
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________
1.11
TEST REPORTS
A.
Submit to the Engineer's Representative Test Reports for information for the
purpose of assessing conformance with information given and design concept
expressed in Contract Documents.
1.12
CERTIFICATES
A.
B.
C.
1.13
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION
A.
1.14
ERECTION DRAWINGS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01333
___________________________________________________________________________
SHOP DRAWINGS, RECORD
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01333-8
DOCUMENTS & AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
1.01
GENERAL
Contractor's submittals mean but not limited to the following list of items
submitted to the Engineer for his approval:
1.02
Insurance Policies
Contractor's Site Layout Organisation Plan(s)
Contractor's Manpower Organisation Chart
Contractor's time schedule and updates
Contractor's staff, sub-contractor's staff qualifications and experience
Shop drawings
Design drawings requested by contract
Samples of materials
Catalogues, data sheets, etc.
Mock ups
All types of reports in writing, photographs, and video tapes
Any other items required by the Contract Documents
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-1
SUBMITTALS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-2
SUBMITTALS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
architectural work and depicting proposed solutions for tight site conditions.
These drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall dimensions of
ductwork, piping, conduit, equipment, fixtures, structural members and
architectural features and shall show clearances between such work.
1.04
PRODUCT DATA
The term "product data" means manufacturers', fabricators' and suppliers'
illustrations, diagrams, standard drawings and schedules, performances charts,
data sheets, catalogues, brochures, instructions for handling, storage, installation
and protection, details of guarantees and other information relating to materials,
manufactured and fabricated items, equipment and the like to be provided by the
Contractor.
1.05
SAMPLES
The term "samples" shall mean natural materials, manufactured and fabricated
items, equipment, devices, appliances and other samples as may be required to
determine whether kind, quality, construction, workmanship, finish, colour and
other characteristics conform with the requirements of the Contract and are
suitable for the uses intended. Accepted samples shall establish standards by
which the Work will be judged.
1.06
SUBMISSIONS
Submissions shall comprise:
A.
B.
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Each shop drawing and sample shall be properly identified with the name of
Project, the Contractor, the sub-contractor, fabricator or manufacturer and the
data. Each drawing and sample shall have a clear space for the stamps of the
Contractor and the Engineer; where clear space is not available, the Contractor
shall attach tags or sticker to the drawing or samples. Shop drawings, data and
samples shall bear the Contractor's stamp certifying that they have been
coordinated and checked by the Contractor and that they are approved by the
contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any quantities and
dimensions which may be shown on the submissions.
Each submission shall be accompanied by an approved transmittal form. The
transmittal forms shall be supplied by the Contractor in A4 size and shall be so
formulated as to contain all the information and details hereinafter described.
Prior to printing of the forms, the Contractor is to agree their format with the
Engineer. the Contractor shall insert the following information on the forms using
a typewriter.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Date of submission.
6.
7.
8.
The applicable detail and sheet numbers of the contract Drawings and the
applicable Specification section, page, clause and paragraph numbers.
(items from more than one specification section should not be submitted on
the same form).
9.
10. Parts/areas, etc., of the Work to which samples pertain and date on which
materials are to be incorporated into the Work.
11. Contractor's remarks including any exceptions or deviations from the
Contract and the reasons there for.
The transmittal forms shall also have space available for the information to be
inserted by the Engineer in accordance with clause 1.8.6 hereunder.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-5
SUBMITTALS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
Should the Contractor intentionally submit drawings data, and/or samples which
differ from the requirements of the Contract Documents, each such difference
must be the subject of a formal request by the Contractor for substitution or
variation, supported by all relevant information.
Submissions which, in the Engineer's opinion, are incomplete, contain errors or
have not been checked or have only been checked superficially will be returned
for resubmission. This action from Contractor will put restraints on the progress
of the Work.
1.07
ENGINEER'S REVIEW
Except for aesthetic matters such as finish and colour and any other matters left
to the Engineer's decision by the Contract, the Engineer's review of shop
drawings, data and samples submitted by the contractor is for general
conformance with the design concept and information contained in the contract
and will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract
requirements, design, documentation and checking.
The Engineer will process each submission within the times agreed in the
program of Works and within such time as is reasonably necessary for review.
The Engineer will note any comments on the drawings, etc., date and sign the
submission to show that it has been inspected and return it to the Contractor
indicating the appropriate action to be taken by the contractor as follows:
A. A APPROVED means that fabrication, manufacture or construction may
proceed.
B. B APPROVED AS NOTED means that fabrication, manufacture or
construction may proceed provided that the Contractor complies with the
Engineer's notations. If, for any reason, the Contractor cannot comply with
such notations, the Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit as
described for submissions stamped C REVISE & RESUBMIT.
C. C REVISED & RESUBMIT means that the submission does not comply with
the Contract and that fabrication, manufacture or construction shall not
proceed. Such submissions are not permitted on the site and are not to be
used. The Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit.
The Engineer will, in addition, insert the following information on the transmittal:
1
2.
3.
4.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-6
SUBMITTALS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
The Engineer will return one set of shop prints, one copy of product data and
one of each sample.
The Engineer's review shall not be construed as a complete check nor shall it
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for any deviations from the Contract
and errors of any kind in the submissions or from the necessity of furnishing
any Work required by the contract which may have been omitted from the
submissions. The Engineer's review of an individual item shall not indicate
review of the complete assembly in which it functions.
Neither acceptance of reviewed submissions nor any comment marked
thereon by the Engineer shall constitute an authorization for any increase in
the Contract price or time. Should any submission or amendments to
submissions required by the Engineer or comments noted on submissions by
the Engineer be considered by the Contractor to involve or be a variation, the
contractor must notify the Engineer without delay and in any case within
seven (7) days and should not proceed with ordering, fabrication, erection or
installation until subsequently instructed by the Engineer. Claims for extra
cost and/or time if made after ordering, fabrication, erection or installation will
not be accepted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation and submission of
any amplification of drawings required by the Engineer and/or needed for the
completion of the Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct location of the Work,
irrespective of approval of submissions by the Engineer and shall pay all
costs and expenses incurred due to improper location of the Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay (at no extra charge to
the Employer) for any alterations of the Work due to discrepancies, errors or
omissions in his submissions whether or not such submissions have been
reviewed by the Engineer, provided that such discrepancies, errors or
omissions are not due to inaccurate information or particulars furnished in
writing to the Contractor by the Engineer.
After shop drawings, data and samples have been finally reviewed by the
engineer, they shall not be departed from unless modified by an Engineer's
Variation Order.
The Contractor shall submit the required number of copies of the final version
of all drawings etc. to the Engineer, distribute additional copies as appropriate
to all affected sub-contractors, etc., and keep at least one copy on site.
1.08
RE-SUBMISSIONS
The Contractor shall ensure that any necessary amendments to submissions are
made in accordance with any comments of the Engineer and without delay.
Re-submitted requirements and procedures and transmittal forms accompanying
resubmissions shall be as for the initial submission (except that transmittal and
submission numbers and dates will differ). The contractor shall indicate on
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-7
SUBMITTALS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.09
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturer's printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing,
in quantities specified for Product Data.
1.10
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers'
certificate to Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but
must be acceptable to Engineer.
1.11
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01300-8
SUBMITTALS
( )
______________________________________________________________
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Temporary Utilities:
1. Temporary electricity.
2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes.
3. Temporary heating.
4. Temporary cooling.
5. Temporary ventilation.
6. Temporary telephone service.
7. Temporary facsimile service.
8. Temporary water service.
9. Temporary sanitary facilities.
10. Temporary drainage.
2. Construction Facilities:
1. Field offices, sheds, vehicles, kitchens and canteen.
2. Vehicular access.
3. Parking.
4. Progress cleaning and waste removal.
5. Project identification.
6. Traffic regulation.
3. Temporary Controls:
1. Barriers.
2. Enclosures and fencing.
3. Protection of the Work.
4. Security.
5. Water control.
6. Dust control.
7. Erosion and sediment control.
8. Noise control.
9. Pest control.
10. Pollution control.
11. Rodent control.
12. Fire protection.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
g. If temporary supply is not granted by MEW, then the Contractor must make his own
arrangement for providing supply of electricity in order to accomplish the work. At
completion of the work remove all temporary electrical equipments and cabling after
obtaining Engineers approval.
2. TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
a. Provide install and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve minimum
lighting level of 21 watt/sq. m.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
b. Provide and maintain 10.8 watt/sq. m lighting to exterior staging, storage areas and
entire site, after dark for security and emergency purposes.
c. Provide and maintain 2.7 watt/sq. m H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for
security purposes.
d. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting
conductors, pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels.
e. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
f.
3. TEMPORARY HEATING
a. Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified
conditions for construction operations.
b. Exercise measures to conserve energy.
4. TEMPORARY COOLING
a. Provide and pay for cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified
conditions for construction operations.
b. Exercise measures to conserve energy.
c. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling in accordance with Enclosures
article in this section.
d. Maintain maximum ambient temperature as required by Kuwait Labour Law, in areas
where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
5. TEMPORARY VENTILATION
a. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to
prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapours, or gases.
b. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction
operations.
6. TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
a. Provide, install and maintain as Section 01514 Temporary Telephones, and pay for
telephone service and one telephone instrument per room, to Contractors field office
at time of project mobilisation, and throughout the contract duration.
b. Provide, install and maintain as Section 01514 Temporary Telephones, and pay for
local telephone services, to Owner, Construction Manager and Engineer's field
offices at time of project mobilization. Provide direct fax lines, Internet lines and
hunting lines for Engineer, Construction Manager and Engineers Representative.
7. TEMPORARY FACSIMILE SERVICE
a. Provide, maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone line to
Contractors field office at time of project mobilisation, and throughout the contract
duration.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
b. Provide maintain and pay for facsimile service and dedicated telephone lines, without
international line facilities, to Owner, Engineer, Construction Manager and Engineer's
Representative Field office.
8. TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
a. Provide and pay for suitable clean, free of deleterious substances and drinkable
quality water service as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction
operations. Connect to existing water source.
b. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available for Sub-contractors at
ground level by hoses with threaded connections.
c. Exercise measures to conserve energy.
d. Co-ordinate with concerned utility authorities and Employer for the supply of the
service.
e. At completion of the work remove all temporary water installations and connection
after obtaining Engineers approval.
f.
g. Provide adequate facilities for the supply of acceptable quality, satisfactorily cooled
drinking water for employees, where work is in progress.
h. All costs for providing temporary water shall be borne by the Contractor.
9. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
a. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facility use is not
permitted. Provide facilities at time of project mobilisation.
b. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
c. The sanitary accommodation at the ground level shall comprise temporary toilet
building(s) in an approved location, of approved construction in compliance with the
local authority having jurisdiction and as per Article 1.9.19.
d. Upon completion of work remove all temporary sanitary facilities after detaining
Engineers approval.
10. TEMPORARY DRAINAGE
a. Upon taking possession of the Site the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
drainage rainwater, ground-water and water arising from construction processes, and
shall provide and maintain such temporary drainage installations as may be
necessary during the period of construction in a manner approved by the Engineers
Representative and so as not to adversely affect the permanent works or adjacent
areas and properties.
b. Temporary drainage installation (storm water and foul water) may be connected to
existing drains provided written permission is obtained from the local authorities have
jurisdiction thereof, and provided such connection work is executed and maintained
in strict accordance with those authorities regulations and directions.
c. At completion of the work, or at such times s the Engineers Representative may
direct, remove all temporary drainage installations and make good existing to the
Engineers Representative satisfaction and as required by the concerned authorities.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
B. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
1. FIELD OFFICES, SHEDS, VEHICLES, KITCHENS AND CANTEENS.
A. TEMPORARY SITE OFICES
i.
Contractors Offices: The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the
provision and maintenance during the operational life of the Contract of adequate
air conditioned and furnished office accommodation and car sheds, for the usage
of the Contractor and his Sub-contractors. Adequate fire prevention measures
shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Such offices shall be sited as
approved by the Engineer or Engineers Representative and shall be cleared
away on completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The layout of the
Contractors site offices is subject to the approval of the Engineers
Representative.
Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide drainage away from
buildings.
ii. Designated spaces will be identified for locating field offices, sheds and storage
areas in agreement with the Engineer. All areas to be fenced and provided with
gates and appropriate gatehouse/security to the approval of the Engineer, See
Article 1.9.2.
iii. Design, supply and erect the projects field offices and sheds in accordance with
statutory requirements and instructions of the Employer.
iv. Obtain approvals from statutory authorities having jurisdiction, pay fees and
provide guarantees as required.
v. Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit for Engineers review and
acceptance, copies of specifications for all field offices and equipment verifying
that products comply with the requirements.
vi. Prior to procurement the Contractor shall submit layout plans for all field offices to
Engineers for review and acceptance.
vii. Install field offices ready for occupancy within 45 days after Date of Enterprise.
viii. Office: Structurally sound, secure, weather tight, with lighting, electrical outlets,
heating, air-conditioning and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy
furniture, drawing rack, and drawing display table.
ix. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs as Article O.
x. Provide separate private office similarly equipped and furnished, for use of
Employer, Engineer and Engineers representatives.
xi. Locate offices and sheds minimum distance of 10m from existing and new
structures to Engineers approval.
xii. Do not use permanent facilities for field offices or for storage without prior
approval of the Engineer.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
2.
3.
4.
Interior Materials in Offices: Sheet type materials for walls and ceilings, heat
and sound insulated, pre-finished or painted; resilient floors and skirting in
entrance, corridors and wet areas. Carpet tiles to all other areas. Provide
false ceilings in all rooms.
5.
Lighting for Offices: Recessed fluorescent light fittings to all rooms, 500 Lux
at desk top height, exterior lighting at entrance doors.
6.
7.
8.
9.
All windows should be located and sized as per approved shop drawings and
provided with operable sash and insect screens and Venetian blinds.
10. Provide minimum four 13A, 240 volt single convenience electrical outlet, for
each room, one on each wall together with two phone points and one
computer networks point.
11. Environmental Control:
12. Heating, Cooling, and Ventilating for Offices: Automatic equipment to
maintain comfort conditions. 20 degrees C, heating and 23 degrees C
cooling by split unit A/C system with built-in heating element.
13. Storage Spaces: Heating and ventilation as needed to maintain products in
accordance with Contract Documents; adequate lighting for maintenance and
inspection of products.
14. Exhaust fan with automatic shutter and insect screen to opening installed to
WC, kitchen, tea rooms and meeting rooms.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-7 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
3. EMPLOYER'S REPRESENTATIVE SECRETARY (1 No.)
One Room each 12 sq. m. area:
B. COMPUTERS:
Shall comply with the latest technology configurations, at date of order.
Personal computer (8 Nos.)
Dell, Compaq, (or approved equivalent).
Minimum Intel Pentium IV original with 1.5 GHz. (or latest at time of
ordering)
256 KB integrated advanced transfer cache.
ECC 256 MB PC-133MHz SDRAM minimum.
32 MB 4X4AGP ATI Rage Ultra 128.
40 GB Hard disk Internal.
56 K V.90 PCI Data/Fax modem or latest.
Multimedia 17 flat panel display (17 viewable) with latest features.
PS/2 104 keyboard - minimum
1 parallel, 2 serial, 2 USB ports minimum
3Com Fast Ether link XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and
Remote Wake-UP (RJ-45)
Internal DVD-ROM drive with latest speed.
Full multimedia (Sound Blaster) latest release.
UPS with 5 minutes electricity battery backup works also as a stabilizer.
3 Nos. HP Laser Jet A4 black and white Printers (latest at time of order)
(or approved equivalent).
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-8 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
C. OTHER EQUIPMENT
Membership with Internet provider in Kuwait. A dedicated direct line for
five (5) users minimum to be able to log into the internet at same time.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
2 Nos. portable large screens for projector show. The screen might be
tilted forward and backward for good screen result projection.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-9 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
1 No.
1 No.
1 No. 4 drawer vertical file cabinet with sling type suspension system.
1 No. Complete sofa set with one three seater and two single seater.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
3. SECRETARIES (1 No.)
Room size 12 sq. m. area
( )
______________________________________________________________
2 Nos. Western WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.
2 Nos. Eastern WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.
2 wash basin with mixer hot and cold with mirrors 60 x 60 cm.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
FOR FEMALES (12 sq. m. overall)
2 Nos. Western WC with flexible hose, toilet rolls holder, coat hook.
3Com Fast Ether link XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
512 MB RAM
ADI 15 Monitor
Keyboard
4. OTHER EQUIPMENT
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-14 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-15 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
3. SECRETARYS ROOM
Two rooms of 15sq. m. area.
4. CORRIDOR
Notice Board: 2 Nos. Fibreboard with wood framing each size
1200x2400mm approx.
5. MEETING ROOM (1 No.)
One room approx. 45 sq. m. area.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-16 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
7. KITCHEN (1No.)
1 No. Min. 120Omm length floor cabinet with stainless steel sink and
1200mm long wall cabinet.
1 No. Cooker range - 2 hot -plates electric and 1 unit gas with table,
gas cylinder and connection.
1 No. Crockery, cutlery and glassware; for making and serving tea
and coffee.
Resident Engineer
1 No.
b.
Engineers
8 Nos.
c.
Secretaries
2 Nos.
d.
Quantity Surveyor
1 No.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-17 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
With the following minimum requirements.
3Com Fast Etherlink XL 10/100 PCI LAN Controller with ACPI and
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-18 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
5. FAX MACHINE: Provide one (1) heavy duty fax machine (A4 size) with
dedicated M.O.C. telephone lines to fax. Provide table and consumables
for fax machine.
6. Provide one (1) Draughting table Ao size with chair and electric lamp
including all accessories.
D. SOFTWARES PROVIDE LATEST VERSION OF:
1. Primavera Expedition.
2. Primavera Project Planner for Windows.
3. Microsoft Office Professional 2000.
4. Windows 2000 Operating System.
5. Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System.
6. Contractor to comply with State Law No. 5, Year 1999, regarding
copyright.
E. MISCELLANEOUS
1. Air Conditioning: to all staff rooms, split unit A/C system for heating and
cooling.
2. Lighting: fluorescent lighting for all rooms.
3. Plumbing and Drainage: As required to provide workable systems
acceptable to the Engineers Representative.
4. All windows to be with Venetian blinds and fly screens.
Stationary Control
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-19 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
2. Radios are to have scan facility and be compatible with other radios in
use on site by the Engineer and C.M. so that any radio set can be used
by any of the user groups and be able to access every other radio.
3. The Contractor shall obtain all licenses and permits to operate this
wireless communication system and ensure that the system complies with
the Regulatory Authorities restrictions and regulations.
4. Include for System maintenance through the whole contract Period plus
twelve months.
5. In addition to above, add 11 Nos. cellular mobile telephones with GSM
lines, for the sole use of the Engineer and Engineers Representatives.
G. CONSUMABLES AND OFFICE EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
1. Provide paper and all consumables for photocopiers, facsimiles,
computers, printers and plotters.
2. Provide stationery items for each member of staff.
3. Provide maintenance service for all equipment of photocopiers,
computers, printers, plotter, server, network, and facsimiles.
4. Provide files and box files of different sizes.
5. Paper, diskettes for computers and optical juke box, toners, replacement
of first aid kit items used, all other consumables, full maintenance for
photocopier, fax, computers and printers, and internet user account
charges.
6. Stationery items for all members of the supervision staff in accordance
with Engineers Representatives requirements, i.e. files, pens, markers,
pads, scales, etc.
H.
I.
Deleted
KITCHENS AND CANTEENS
1. All kitchens and canteens are maintained to the hygienic requirements of
the Ministry of Public Health.
2. Food beverages served from all kitchens shall be prepared and provided
in conformance with the latest requirements of the Ministry of Public
Health and the Kuwait Municipality. All kitchens shall be open to
inspections for hygiene conducted by the concerned government
authorities.
3. All staff who are employed to prepare food and beverages from the
kitchen shall have been medically certified and accordingly obtained
health cards from the Ministry of Public Health before commencing duties.
4. The Ministry of Public Works and the governmental authorities
supervising the health affairs in the country shall have the right to remedy
the health requirements by Contractors personnel and the Contractor will
not be entitled to claim for any compensation pertaining thereto.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-20 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
J. PREPARATION:
1. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures sloped for drainage away
from buildings.
K. INSTALLATION:
1. Installation: Install office spaces ready for occupancy 45 days after Date
of Enterprise.
2. Parking: As item 1.5. Hard surfaced parking spaces for use by Employer,
Construction Manager, and Engineers Representative connected to
office by hard surfaced walk.
3. Employee Residential Occupancy: Not allowed on employer property.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-21 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
2. VEHICULAR ACCESS:
A. Construct temporary all-weather access roads from public thoroughfares to serve
construction area, of width and load bearing capacity to accommodate unimpeded
traffic for construction purposes.
B. Extend and relocate vehicular access as Work progress requires, provide detours as
necessary for unimpeded traffic flow.
C. Location as indicated on Drawings and approved by Employer.
D. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 6m wide driveways
with turning space between and around combustible materials.
E. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants and control valves free of obstructions.
F. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
G. Use existing on-site roads for construction traffic only as approved by the Engineer.
H. The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself regarding the suitability and
availability for his use during the Contract Period of access routes and the like and
shall be entirely responsible for the provision of any signs or directions on such
routes that may be considered necessary for the guidance of his personnel, subcontractors, suppliers and the like and for obtaining all necessary permission from
any Government, Ministry or Land Owner concerned, for the use of such routes or
the provision of such signs or directions. The Employer shall not be held responsible
for any claims that may be made by any Land Owner.
I.
The Employer will not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular access
route and will not entertain any claim in respect of the non-suitability or nonavailability for continuous use during the Contract Period of any such route.
J. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary means of access to the site
from the nearest permanent roadway together with any necessary crossovers and all
necessary temporary site roads leading to or upon the Site and/or working areas.
K. The Contractor shall take over the existing temporary roads, utilize them and
maintain the same during his Contract period, but the Contractor must co-ordinate/cooperate and share these roads as necessary with PAAET the Engineers, Engineers
Representative and other Contractors on site.
L. The means of access, crossovers and temporary roads shall be maintained, altered,
adapted, etc., as may be found necessary during the course of the Contract and
excavated and cleared away upon completion including forking, leaving same to the
satisfaction of the Engineers Representative.
M. Access to the Site for delivery of construction material or equipment shall be made
only from locations approved by the Engineers Representative.
N. Contractor to provide flagmen during all working hours at each road crossing where
temporary construction access roads cross or abut permanent roads.
O. The Contractor must ensure that all access remain clear to provide access to other
users such as may be required for emergency vehicles, service vehicles, and other
contractors.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
3. PARKING:
A. Provide temporary shaded asphalt surface parking areas to accommodate
construction personnel as follows:
-
Owners representative:
12
Construction Manager:
Resident Engineer:
22
Visitors:
Prior to Substantial Completion, bases for permanent roads and parking areas
may be used for construction traffic subject to the Engineers approval.
ii. Avoid traffic loading beyond paving design capacity. Tracked vehicles not
allowed.
iii. Use of permanent parking structures is not permitted.
I.
Maintenance:
i.
Maintain traffic and parking areas in sound condition free of excavated material,
construction equipment, products, mud.
ii. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction; promptly
repair breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies, to
maintain paving and drainage in original, or specified, condition.
J. Removal, Repair:
i.
ii. Remove underground work and compacted materials to depth of 600mm; fill and
grade site as specified.
iii. Repair existing facilities damaged by use, to original specified condition.
K. Mud from Site Vehicles: Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before
entering streets.
4. PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Maintain areas and buildings under Contractors control free of waste materials,
debris, and rubbish at all times. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition and as
required by the Engineers Representative.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, craw spaces, and
other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-23 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
C. Clean interior areas and all floor/building daily to provide suitable conditions of work.
D. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on
as as-needed basis.
E. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet
or newly coated surfaces.
F. The Contractor must keep all working areas clear of obstructions, surplus materials,
unused plant and debris that are unsightly, obstructive and/or hazardous to the safety
of all persons expected to be on the premises at any time.
G. The Contractor is advised that a clean and organised site is advantageous to his
costs and timely progress. This reflects on his management efforts to minimize waste
materials, improve safety and achieve a smooth flow of labour and materials on Site
with minimum obstructions.
H. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at most, weekly and dispose
of off site.
I.
Three (3) painted signs of construction, of construction, size, design, content and
location as directed by the Engineers Representative. Please refer to Drawing
No.A80061.
ii. Provide sign at each field office, storage shed, and directional signs to direct
traffic into and within site. Relocate as Work progress and phases requires.
iii. Provide municipal traffic agency directional traffic signs to and within site.
iv. No other signs are allowed without the Engineers permission except those
required by law.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-24 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
C. Design sign and structure to withstand 140 km/hr wind velocity.
D. Sign Painter: Experienced as professional sign painter for minimum three years.
E. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to withstand weathering, fading, and chipping for
duration of construction.
F. Show content, layout, lettering, colour, foundation, structure, sizes, and grades of
members.
G. Sign Materials:
i.
Install project identification sign within 30 days after date fixed by Notice to
Proceed.
ii. Erect at designated location and location of high public visibility adjacent to main
entrance to site, as approved by the Engineers Representative.
iii. Erect supports and framing on secure foundation, rigidly braced and framed to
resist wind loading.
iv. Install sign surface plumb and level, with butt joints. Anchor securely.
v. Paint exposed surfaces of sign, supports, and framing.
I.
Maintenance: Maintain signs and supports clean, repair deterioration and damage.
Post Mounted and Wall Mounted Traffic Control and Informational Signs: As
approved by authority having jurisdiction.
( )
______________________________________________________________
E. Traffic Signs:
i.
ii. Provide, operate, and maintain traffic control signals to direct and maintain
orderly flow of traffic in areas under Contractor's control, and areas affected by
Contractor's operations.
iii. Relocate as Work progresses, to maintain effective traffic control.
F. Removal:
i.
C. TEMPORARY CONTROLS:
1. BARRIERS
A. Provide fencing/gates, guard house with guards and other barriers to prevent
unauthorised entry to Engineers and Engineers Representatives as well as all
other, field offices, sheds, storage areas and construction areas, and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations
and demolition.
B. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from
damage.
2. ENCLOSURES AND FENCING
A. Construction: New fence and gate from mild steel or RHS posts and rails with
minimum 1.8mm thick galvanised trough section sheeting panels pre-painted in two
colours to the approval of the Engineer. Post shall be at maximum 2.4m centres, set
in concrete foundations minimum size 450x450x450mm.
B. Provide 2.50m high fence around field offices, sheds, storage areas and construction
site; equip with 5 metres wide vehicular and 1.2 metres wide pedestrian gates with
locks and bolts.
C. Prepare and submit shop-drawings of temporary enclosures, fencing and gates to
withstand 140 Km/Hr wind velocity for Engineers review and approval.
D. Give all necessary notices, obtain licence, permits and pay any fees in connection
with the work herein.
E. Relocate and extend during successive stages of construction on in co-ordination
with other Contractors on site and Governmental Authorities with no extra cost to the
Engineer.
F. Maintain during progress of work. Wash and repaint painted surfaces semi-annually.
G. Provide adequate safety barriers, guard rails, handrails, covers to trenches and
openings, with safety signage or tapes; as required to comply with the requirements
of Authorities having jurisdiction.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-26 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
H. Remove safety fence and gates on completion of construction period plus 2 months
after obtaining Engineers approval.
I.
Protect Work products, materials, plant, and temporary work from theft,
vandalism, and unauthorised entry.
ii. Initiate program in co-ordination with Employers and other Contractors existing
security system at project mobilisation.
iii. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner acceptance
precludes need for Contractor security or as directed by Engineer.
B. Entry Control:
i.
C. Security Service:
i.
Employ uniformed guard service to provide watchmen at site twenty four hours a
day, seven days a week.
D. Restrictions:
i.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-27 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
5. WATER CONTROL
A. Rough grade site and provide all necessary drainage to prevent standing water and
to direct surface drainage away from excavations, trenches, adjoining properties, and
public right-of-way until permanent drainage is accepted.
B. Protect site from accumulating or running water. Provide water barriers as required to
protect site from soil erosion.
C. Allow for removal of temporary drainage upon acceptance of the whole work.
D. Maintain excavations and trenches free of water. Provide and operate pumping
equipment of a capacity to control water flow.
E. Provide dewatering system to maintain excavations dry and free of water inflow on a
24 hours basis.
i.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-28 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
11. RODENT CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading
premises.
12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Ensure that no fires are lit, in or about the Site, and take all reasonable precautions to
avoid outbreaks of fire on the works, temporary works, offices, stores and other
places and things connected therewith. Especially with respect to the safe storage of
petroleum products, paints, explosives and other combustible, dangerous or
hazardous goods. Comply with all rules, regulations and orders, which are made by
local authority having jurisdiction, and provide and maintain in good order and hold
available at all times, and in all places connected with the works a sufficiency of
efficient fire fighting facilities and equipment together with personnel trained in its
use.
B. The type, location and sufficiency of the fire fighting facilities and equipment shall be
to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's satisfaction and shall be approved
by the Kuwait Fire Department. Such facilities/equipment shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
i.
ii. Temporary fire pumps shall be provided in duplicate and shall be automatically
controlled by pressure switches.
Capacity of each pump shall be 460
litres/minute against 110 metres head as Grundfos (Denmark) Fig No. CR30110/10 (20 HP) or other approved equal.
iii. Temporary standpipe system (min. 10Omm dia. steel) with landing valves and
30m cradled fire hoses with nozzles. The number of hose stations around the
site shall be approved by the Engineer, or Engineer's Representative and KFD
and shall be sufficient to ensure that all parts of the permanent works are within
effective reach of water hoses.
iv. Provide one 4.5 Kg dry powder fire extinguisher (non CFC type) adjacent to each
hose station and at any other location requested by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative.
v. Provide all fire fighting facilities and equipment required by the Kuwait Fire
Department, whether or not specifically detailed herein. It is not permitted to use
the temporary fire fighting system for any other water source purpose at site.
C. Take adequate safety precautions during metal welding and torch cutting operations
as follows:
i.
Welding or torch cutting operations shall be carried out only in well ventilated
spaces having little or no combustible materials in the vicinity, and preferably in
an area designated and used exclusively as a 'welding shop'.
ii. Where welding or torch cutting operations are carried out in-situ, surrounding
areas shall be suitably protected by the covering or screening off, and suitable
portable fire extinguishers shall be kept immediately available with an attendant
standing-by.
iii. The number of gas cylinders in any working area and the storage of such
cylinders, full or empty, shall be in accordance with the FOC leaflet, 'Precautions
to be observed in connection with the use of gas or electric welding and cutting
apparatus'.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-29 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
D. Gasoline and other flammable liquids shall be stored in and dispensed from 'UL'
listed safety containers and in conformance with requirements of the KFD. Storage
shall not be within the building.
E. Tarpaulins used during construction work shall be made of material, which is resistant
to fire, water and weather. Tarpaulins shall have 'UL' approval and comply with US
Federal Specifications CCC-D-746 and KFD requirements.
F. Make all arrangements for periodical inspection by local Fire Authorities and
Insurance Underwriters' Inspectors, co-operate with such Authorities and promptly
carry out their recommendations.
G. Ensure that adequate, and to the extent possible, unimpeded means of egress from
all parts of the Works, is available at all times in case fire.
H. At the completion of the Work, or at such times as the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative may direct, remove all temporary fire fighting installations and
equipment and replace all worn or damaged parts of the permanent systems leaving
such systems in first-class condition equal to new.
I.
The temporary fire fighting system shall be fully operational as soon as construction
starts. Extend the system progressively as construction proceeds maintaining its
operational status at all times.
J. Schedule work so that risers for the permanent fire protection system are installed,
tested and made operable at the earliest possible date. Obtain early approval and
delivery of permanent fire pumps and jockey pump with temporary motor controller
and install in permanent or temporary location ready for use in the event of fire.
Furnish sufficient properly sized fire hoses with nozzles to provide adequate
coverage of all floors and the site.
K. The temporary fire fighting shall not be removed until the permanent system is
operational, thereby ensuring that the building is always protected during
construction. The permanent system shall not be placed in operation without the prior
approval in writing of the Engineers Representative.
13. TEMPORARY STORAGE AND PLANT
A. Provide at or near the Site and maintain in good condition, suitable watertight storage
required for materials that may be damaged by storage in open and provide
adequate Fire Protection as approved by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
B. On completion of the Works, or when directed by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative, clear away all temporary storage, plant and reinstate areas to their
previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
14. TEMPORARY COVERINGS
A. Protect finished surfaces including jambs and soffits of openings used as
passageways or through which materials are handled against possible damage
resulting from conduct of work by trades.
B. Tight wood sheeting shall be laid under all materials stored on finished surfaces.
Planking shall be laid before moving materials over finished areas. Wheelbarrows
used for such areas shall have rubber-tyre wheels.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-30 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
C. Finished surfaces including factory finished and job-finished items shall be clean and
not marred upon delivery of the Project to the Employer. The Contractor shall without
extra compensation refinish such spaces where such surfaces prove to have been
inadequately protected and are damaged.
D. Waterproofed and roof surfaces shall not be subjected to heavy traffic nor used for
storage of materials. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the
work, adequate protection, subject to approval by the Engineer or Engineer's
Representative, shall be provided.
E. Provide all necessary protection to executed work to the approval of the Engineer or
Engineer's Representative, including but not limited to temporary coverings and
protective measures stated herein.
15. TEMPORARY STAIRS, SCAFFOLDING, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS ETC.
A. Provide and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, scaffolding, ladders,
ramps, runways, chutes, tower cranes and/or other hoisting facilities etc., as required
for the proper execution of works.
B. As soon as permanent stairs are erected, provide temporary protective treads,
handrails and shaft enclosures.
16. TEMPORARY MATERIALS AND PERSONNEL HOISTS
A. Provide temporary material hoists to the Engineer's or Engineer's Representative's
approval and as required facilitating the execution of Works. Such hoists shall be
erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and in accordance
with ANSI A10.5 "Safety Requirements for Material Hoists", and shall not be used for
transporting personnel.
B. Hoists shall be erected and maintained in compliance with any local regulations and
in accordance with ANSI A10.4 "Safety Requirements for Personnel Hoists".
C. All hoists shall be constructed, maintained and removed so as not to cause damage,
staining or marring of the permanent work.
D. Provide tower crane(s) of adequate capacity for material handling and execution of
works. Upon installation of tower crane(s), get the entire installation tested by Lloyds
or other approved testing agency certifying fitness prior to commencement of
operation.
17. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION OPENINGS.
A. Provide openings in slabs, walls and partitions where required for moving in or out
large pieces of equipment and plant. Close or restore and finish all openings after
the equipment and plant is in place or removed. Structural modifications shall be
subject to review by the Engineer or Engineer's Representative.
18. SAFETY MEASURES AND STANDARDS
A. ACCIDENT PREVENTION PROGRAMME
i.
Within 30 days of contract signing, the contractor will submit, for the Engineer's
approval, his Accident Prevention Programme naming the key person in his
organization who will be responsible for administering of Safety Programme,
which follows, and in particular the safety requirements listed in the safety check
list.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-31 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
ii. All employees will be physically qualified for performing the duties to which they
are assigned. Operators of equipment and vehicles shall be able to read and
understand the signs, signals and operating instructions is use. Prior to start of
work, arrangements will be made for assistance from medical services in
existence in the vicinity of the project site. Communication and transportation to
effectively care of injured workers will be provided as necessary. First Aid Kits, in
the ratio of one unit for each 25 persons or less, will be provided on the job. They
shall be easily accessible to all the workers.
B. SAFETY PROGRAMME
i.
The safety programme established and maintained on this project will incorporate
the requirements of the Safety and Health Requirements of the Government of
Kuwait, the AGC manual of Accident Prevention in construction, and all other
local codes and regulations.
ii. The purpose of the Programme is to elicit the interest and efforts of all personnel
both management and supervisory, required for the prevention of injuries and
accidents, through proper and through training and instructions to employees and
labour.
All contractors are responsible for the administration of a comprehensive safety
programme.
iii. This safety programme embodies the prevention of accident injury, occupational
illness and property damage. Each contractor shall provide and maintain a safe,
hazard free workplace for their employees, for fellow workers and the general
public. As a minimum, the contractor's safety programme shall incorporate all of
the principals of the project safety programme.
iv. This project safety programme shall ensure the involvement and active
participation of all project employees by requiring safety training will promote
recognition of unsafe acts, potential and actual hazards and the immediate
corrective action to be taken. All employees shall be constantly aware of their
responsibility to work in a safe manner.
v. Each contractor, and his subcontractors, has a contractual obligation to perform
their work using safe methods and to comply with Project's safety programme.
C. MANAGEMENT ORGANIZATION
i.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-32 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
8. Submit Job Hazards Analysis for each major phase or element of work as
necessary.
9. Post Safety signs on the project.
D. SUBCONTRACTOR PARTICIPATION
The officers and personnel of all subcontractors shall be responsible for compliance
with this safety programme.
This will entail indoctrinating their on-the-job
representatives with a working knowledge of the General Safety Programme on the
job. They are further responsible to have their firms represented at all project safety
meetings.
E. ACCIDENT PREVENTION RESPONSIBILITY
i.
Safety Meetings will be held at least once a month at the job site. The meetings
will be convened and conducted by the safety co-ordinator. All supervisors and
foremen are expected to be in attendance. Each subcontractor will have a
responsible representative present to follow through on information and
resolutions discussed and adapted at these meetings.
The Engineer's
representative may attend these meetings.
ii. The Agenda for the safety meetings will generally include inter-alia.
1. Development of timely topics for discussion and dissemination of safety
bulletins, Signs and Notices.
2. A review of the Safety Co-ordinator's inspection.
3. Identification of potential safety hazards in the coming month and discussion
and implementation of steps to be taken to avoid the same.
4. Appoint of safety Representatives for subcontractors.
iii. All supervisors and foremen are responsible to plan and accomplish their work
with due regard for the safety of all individuals on the job site. They will be
expected to eliminate all possible accident hazards when planning the work under
their control. It is expected the subcontractors will observe and correct any
accident producing practices before injury occurs. If an accident does occur, they
will investigate to determine the cause and take the required corrective action to
prevent a recurrence. All accidents shall immediately be reported to the project
superintendent and to the Engineer.
F. FIRST AID AND MEDICAL FACILITIES
The Contractor shall provide first aid and medical services as required by the relevant
municipal and ministerial authorities of Kuwait.
G. ACCIDENT REPORTING
i.
All lost time injuries, property damage accidents (excluding of project vehicle
accidents) and material losses in which the property damage exceeds KD 100/will be reported in writing to the Engineer within 48 hours of the accident or
incident. Immediate notification will be provided in advance of the written report.
ii. In the event of any employees being sent to a doctor for treatment, a release will
be obtained from the doctor stating whether (1) the employee is not fit for duty;
(2) the employee is fit for light duty; or (3) the employee is fit for duty. A copy of
this release will be accompanied with the accident report.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-33 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
H. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
i.
Minimum requirements for protective equipment shall be the wearing of hard hats
by all personnel, including subcontractors, as well as protective clothing, as
warranted.
All hand tools and portable power tools to be used shall be of good order and
shall be used for the purpose intended. All electric power tools will be grounded
and will be inspected frequently for worn out parts and connections.
ii. Circular saws shall be equipped with guards that automatically enclose cutting
edges. Radial arm power saws shall be equipped with automatic brakes.
Explosives actuated tools and the use will be discouraged, and must have prior
written Engineer's Representative's approval before delivery to the project.
J. WORKER INDOCTRINATION
i.
( )
______________________________________________________________
ii.
iii.
iv.
Establish plan for location of shanties, material storage, and personal facilities
and traffic flow
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
Arrange-for Doctor
ix.
x.
xi.
Post phone numbers for police, fire, medical and ambulance service at each of
the on site telephone locations
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
obtain form the Engineer's Representative a report form for reporting accidents
and injuries
xvi.
xvii.
xviii. Hire qualified first aid personnel, if more than ten minutes from a medical
facility with which and emergency medical service has been established
xix.
xx.
Prepare and post at each on site telephone location "off hours emergency
notification list"
xxi.
xxii.
1. Hard hats
a) Safety belts
b) Goggles
c) Ear protection
d) Carbon monoxide tester
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-35 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
xxvi. Post sketch, showing location of fire alarm boxes, hydrants and first aid
facilities
xxvii. Arrange for and post, safety posters and warning signs
xxviii. Establish weekly tool box and safety talks
xxix. Set up an accident control chart
xxx.
xxxi. Appoint a safety supervisor and set date for the first safety meeting.
L. NON-COMPLIANCE WITH SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
i.
Where the Contractor violates any of the safety provisions described within this
section 01500, the Engineer shall take the appropriate remedial action, and all
costs associated therewith for the Contractor's account.
ii. On the occurrence of the first violation, the contractor shall be warned in writing
by the Engineer's Representative and shall be instructed to remedy the violation
within a specified time. Where the contractor fails to remedy the violation within
the time stipulated, the contractor will be prohibited from carrying out any further
work within the affected area until the specific exposure has been corrected.
iii. On the occurrence of all further violations, the severity of each violation shall be
considered by the Engineer's Representative.
iv. The contractor instructed accordingly. Where the contractor unreasonably ignores
the Engineer's Representative's instructions, then the foreman responsible for
operations in the area where the safety violations are occurred shall be dismissed
from the site.
v. Should the contractor persistently breach the safety requirements with undue
reason, then the principal of the contractor shall be summoned to the site and
instructed to take the appropriate action to ensure that his employees comply with
the safety requirements of the contract. The following is a summary of engineer's
action in the event of the contractor's non-compliance with safety requirements.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-36 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
Summary of Engineer's Action
In the Event of Contractor's non-Compliance
with Safety Requirements
CATEGORY
ORDER OF
ACTION
SAFETY ITEM
Material
- Scaffolding
1.0
Or
- Guard Rails
2.0
Equipment
- Excavation Protection
- Safe Hand & Power Tools
- Temporary Elect. Grounding
-
Machinery
Equipment
Protective
- Head Protection
Garments
- Eye Protection
&
3.0
Mech.
1.0
- Hearing Protection
- Respiratory Protection
2.0
- Hand Protection
- Foot Protection
Facilities
- Body Protection
3.0
First Aid
1.0
Sanitation
20
Material Storage
Fire Protection
ACTION
Responsible
employee
prevented from continuing work
unit properly attired.
When same employees are in
breach a second time, he will be
dismissed from the site.
When more than 2 employees
are dismissed per week, then
responsible foreman shall be
dismissed.
Contractor warned to supply. If
contractor fails to supply,
engineer shall supply and
deduct the cost from the
contractor.
Steel frame with sandwich panel to walls and partitions, and corrugated metal
sheet roofing. Size and layout to be determined by the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer's Representative.
ii. Wall mounted lavatories with faucet, plastic shelf and mirror. At least 1 No. f or
the use of and per each (25) persons.
iii. Wall hung urinals with water stop valves. At least 1 number for the use of, and
per each (25) persons.
iv. Water closets with plastic flush tank and flexible wash hose. At least 1 No. f or
the use of and per each (25) persons.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-37 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________
v. Electrical water heaters complete with safety valves.
vi. Electrical connection for power and lighting.
vii. Exhaust fans and ventilators.
viii. Water supply connection from source provided by the Contractor.
ix. Plumbing and drainage connections.
x. Percolating (collection) pits of proper capacity.
xi. Drainage manholes as required.
C. Toilets must be kept clean and sanitary.
D. The Contractor shall clear away and remove all structures, buildings, tanks,
manholes, pits and to make the area clean and tidy as and when instructed by the
Engineer.
E. Comply with Municipal and Health Authorities regulations and provide the facilities
ready for inspection by such authorities whenever requested.
F. Labour, workmen or staff found to be using areas other than these facilities shall be
discharged immediately.
D. REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
1. Remove temporary utilities, barriers, fencing, gates, equipment, facilities, and materials,
at Substantial Completion inspection.
2. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 600mm.
3. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
4. Restore existing and permanent facilities used during construction to original condition.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
END OF SECTION 01500
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01500-38 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL
( )
________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Products.
B.
C.
D.
Product options.
E.
PRODUCTS
A.
1.3
1.4
Furnish
B.
C.
B.
C.
D.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E.
Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection. Obtain Engineers approval for any on site storage and storage areas.
F.
G.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
H.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01600 - 1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
( )
________________________________________________________________
I.
1.5
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
B.
Definitions
1.
The terms Product shall mean any material including proprietary goods,
equipment and manufactured items.
2.
3.
Submittals
1.
b.
c.
ii.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01600 - 2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
( )
________________________________________________________________
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
2.
3.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01600 - 3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
( )
________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
NOT USED.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01600 - 4
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1.01
DESCRIPTION
This Section describes the requirements and general procedures for
expediting the final stage of the Contract.
1.02
CLEANING UP
A.
Final Cleaning Up
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
b.
Previous Variations
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01700-1
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
2.
D.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
1.03
A.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01700-2
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
g.
B. Record Drawings
1.
2.
3.
C. As-Built Drawings
Refer to Document II, General Conditions, for Additional Requirements
Governing As-Built Drawings
1.
2.
3.
1.04
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01700-3
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
B.
C.
D.
E.
Provide a list in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet
and space for insertion of data.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/01700-4
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION
The preparation of the site of the Works by the removal of all impediments to the
commencement of the Earthworks for the permanent constructions.
1.02
APPROVAL OF ENGINEER
A.
The approval of the Engineer that the site has been properly prepared shall be
obtained before subsequent earthworks are put into operating.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01
Remove all debris from the site of the Works inclusive of loose and semi-buried
pieces of concrete, etc. which require disposal to avoid incorporation with excavated
material which may be used in filling into excavation.
3.02
Scrape out all growing vegetation including roots which require disposal to avoid
incorporation with excavated material which may be used in filling into
excavations.
3.03
All material removed under this section shall be disposed of in a place of deposit
found by the Contractor who shall be responsible for all charges in connection
therewith. No burning of materials on site will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 02110
______________________________________________________________________________
III-2/02110-1
SITE CLEARING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02250
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Provide shop drawings for the lateral support system for the approval
of the Engineer.
F.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01330
Section 02240
Submittals
Dewatering
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02250-1
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Written data and calculations showing the design intent for the lateral
support systems, to include Engineering calculations and design
assumptions for determination of loads and stresses acting on and
within the lateral support systems. The calculations shall be prepared
by a Registered Professional Engineer, who is experienced in this field.
D.
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02250-2
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Examine the site and all work prepared by others and monitor as work
progresses and report to the Engineer any defects having detrimental
effects on work of this Section.
E.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Work shall comply with all rules, regulations, laws and ordinances of all
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02250-3
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
The Contractor shall visit the site and make such inspections, as he
deems necessary and reach his own conclusions regarding the nature
of the ground and the conditions likely to be encountered. No claim due
to site conditions, nature of soil and obstacles encountered will be
entertained.
C.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
The Contractors design shall take into account all soil pressures,
hydrostatic pressures, applicable traffic and construction equipment
loads, stockpiles and any other surcharge loads.
D.
The lateral support system shall retain and provide support for adjacent
soil, water, subsurface, utilities, streets, and other features and protect
them from damage due to settlement, lateral movement, loss-ofground, vibration or any other causes related to the work. All
precautions should be taken to prevent such damage.
E.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02250-4
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
F.
b)
3.3
SCHEDULE
A.
Produce a program scheduling the start and finish date of the works
and the sequence of operations.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02250-5
EARTHWORK SUPPORT
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02300
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
PART-I, GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work covered by this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials, and performing all operations in
connection with excavating, placing, stabilizing and compacting earth
(including rock) and disposal of excavated material.
B.
1.02
RELATED STANDARDS
BS 4I0 Test sieves
BS 812 Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sands and
filters.
1.03
A.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site prior to submitting his
tender, examine the site, records of existing utilities and construction, record
of test boring, and the sub-surface exploration reports to determine all
conditions under which the work will be performed.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Within the limits of excavation, remove existing piping, cesspits, sub soil
drainage systems, conduit, manholes and related items which are to be
abandoned and plug open ends with concrete.
G.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 1
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
H.
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Employer against any
damage whatsoever caused to any structures, services adjacent to or under
the Site, due to the Contractors construction activities.
I.
1.04
A.
Perform all work in such a manner as to ensure the safety of the Works, the
public and adjoining sites and so as to cause as little inconvenience as
possible to the public and adjoining Owners, and allow in the Tender for all
necessary precautions to that end.
B.
C.
Keep stores and material away from the edge of excavations so as to allow
free movement of labourers and staff around the excavations.
D.
Use sturdy steel or timber stairs as means of entry to and exit from
excavations. Do not use ladders.
E.
Execute earthwork and shoring activities (and site work generally) in such a
manner to ensure that no damage occurs to adjoining property.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit information and full details regarding the procedures proposed for
excavating over the area of the site, for the review and approval of the
Engineer.
B.
C.
The Engineers approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations and
liabilities under the Contract and the Contractor shall be responsible for
executing the excavations and temporary works in a safe and workmanlike
manner.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 2
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
PART -2, PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
51mm
100
38mm
70-100
25mm
55-85
19mm
50-80
9mm
40-70
No. 4
30-60
No. 10
20-50
No. 40
10-30
No. 200
5-15
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ordinary Fill
1.
Ordinary fill shall be natural soil, well-graded and free from all organic,
weak, compressible and expansive materials,(such as high plastic
clays) and also free of materials subject to decay or decomposition,
and shall contain no stone larger then 150 mm in maximum dimension.
2.
3.
Use ordinary fill for general grading and back-filling except in areas
where Compaction controlled fill or drainage fill is required.
4.
Use ordinary fill for earth modeling. Heights of mounds (Max. slope (1:2
shall be as indicated in the drawings. The mounds shall be integrated
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 3
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
naturally within the area by careful contouring. The sides of the
mounds shall be perfectly stable and resistant to erosion in the event
of heavy rain.
5.
C.
D.
Drainage Fill
1.
2.
Water
1.
2.
The use of fresh water and brackish water will be permitted for all
earthwork operations (provided that the total dissolved solids do not
exceed 4500 parts per million) unless specifically stated to the
contrary.
2.02
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Employ and pay all charges for a Soil Testing Laboratory acceptable to the
Engineer, to perform all tests and submit reports specified in this Section
B.
C.
Testing of Materials: Contractor shall performed all tests and any additional
tests shall perform all tests herein specified and any additional tests as may
be required and submit test reports to the Engineer, including the following:
1.
One optimum moisture maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered in subgrades and fills under isolated and continuous
footings, slabs on grade and paved areas. Determine maximum
densities in accordance with ASTM-D1557.
2.
b.
c.
d.
e.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 4
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
F.
If, based on reports of the Soil Testing Laboratory and inspection, the Subgrade or backfills are found to be below the specified density, the Engineer
may require additional compaction and testing and all this shall be carried out
at the expense of the Contractor.
EXCAVATION
A.
General
1.
Clear and grub the site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation (above
and below-grade)and all disused services and obstructions to
construction.
2.
B.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 5
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
Excavation for Paved Areas and Kerbs: Sub-grade shall be approved by the
Engineer before proceeding with construction of pavements and kerbs.
a.
b.
F.
G.
H.
Trench Excavation: Trenches for piping and utilities shall be not less that
400mm nor more than 600mm wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to
be laid therein. Bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded with bell holes
scooped out to provide uniform bearing support of pipe and utilities on
undisturbed soil throughout their entire length, except where other means of
supporting pipe are indicated. Rock materials shall be excavated to 150mm
below pipe invert and bed back-filled with drainage fill ,well tamped in place.
3.02
A.
B.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 6
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
- 95%
General Grading
- 90%
1.
Do not compact soil when the moisture content varies more than 3%
from the optimum moisture content. Maintain moisture content by
wetting or drying manipulation. Suspended compacting operations
when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain or other
unsatisfactory conditions.
2.
3.03
A.
The Contractor shall gain prior written approval from the Engineer and from
the appropriate authorities having jurisdiction for the disposal of surplus
excavated materials from site.
B.
Material resulting from clearing and grubbing operations must not be burnt on
the site. Dispose of all such material legally off the Employers property.
END OF SECTION 02300
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02300- 7
EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02360
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK:
A.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
B.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
1.4
1.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
C.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02360-1
TERMITE CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.7
B.
C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
MIX DILUTION
A.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSPECTION
A.
Verify the soil surfaces are sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to
receive treatment.
B.
APPLICATION
A.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02360-2
TERMITE CONTROL
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.3
D.
E.
F.
RETREATMENT
A.
B.
END OF SECTION
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02360-3
TERMITE CONTROL
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02772
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL REFERENCE
A.
The work of this Section is integral with the whole of the Contract Documents and is
not intended to be interpreted outside that context.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
The principle work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to the following.
1.
1.03
RELATED WORK
A.
Cast-in-Place Concrete:
1.04
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as
further cited herein.
ASTM
BS 368
:
:
Section 03300
1.05
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Prepare and submit shop drawings in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract and as directed by the Engineer and obtain the Engineers approval before
proceeding with the fabrication and work.
1.06
SUBMITTAL
A.
Submit all samples and other information as requested by the Engineer of materials
specified herein in accordance with requirements of the Contract, and before
ordering materials, obtain written approval from the Engineer.
Precast Concrete Kerbs: Size as shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
B.
After the material samples have been approved, build for the Engineers approval a
sample length of precast concrete kerb, in conjunction with the sample panel of unit
pavers, showing materials and jointing to be used.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02772-1
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
A.
B.
1.08
COORDINATION
A.
The work of this Section shall be completely co-ordinated with the work of other
Sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this
Section before the installation of items herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
C.
Desert sand to BS882 or1201.The maximum clay and silt content should not exceed
3%.
D.
2.02
BEDDING MATERIALS
A.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02772-2
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
WORKMANSHIP
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing a proper surface to receive precast
concrete kerbs.
Floor slabs and concrete to receive precast concrete kerb finish shall be clean and
free of all foreign matter detrimental to the bond.
B.
3.02
APPLICATION
A.
Set kerbs in full bed of mortar complying with ASTM 270 Type M to the approval of
the Engineer.
B.
Provide expansion joints in kerbs at the ends of all returns and at intervals not
exceeding 6 Meters.
3.03
A.
At the end of each day, remove from the site and dispose of all cartons, rubbish and
debris resulting from the work of this Section.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02772-3
PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02780
UNIT PAVERS / INTERLOCK TILES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
General: Provide unit pavers in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.02
STANDARDS
A.
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data for the types of manufactured
units, including certification that the types of manufactured units comply with specified
requirements.
B.
Shop Drawing: Submit shop drawings indicating the dimension of units, details of
special shapes and reinforcing for each unit.
C.
Samples: Submit full size samples using the materials, and finish specified. Sample
acceptance will be for colour, finish, and appearance only. Compliance with other
requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.05
VISUAL MOCK-UP
A.
1.06
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Transport, store and handle paver units in a manner to avoid undue strains, cracks,
staining or other damage. Store units free of the ground and protect from mud or rain
splashes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02780-1
UNIT PAVERS/INTERLOCK TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Concrete Pavers: Precast concrete tile, 65mm thick, Size and Type shall be as per
requirement of the contract and as shown in the drawing .
1.
General: Obtain cement, aggregate, and water from single source sufficient to
complete the entire work and assure regularity of appearance and uniformity of
colour.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Mix Design
a.
Properties of Mix: Adjust design mix (mixes) as required to obtain the
strength specified.
(i) Compressive Strength: 300 Kg/Sq. cm characteristic cube strength
minimum at 28 days.
(ii) Slump: 75mm maximum.
(iii) Air Entrainment: 3% minimum, 5% maximum.
8.
Size: As shown.
C.
Setting Bed for Interlocking Tile and Concrete Pavers: Sand complying with BS 882 or
ASTM C33.
D.
Joint Grout
1.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02780-2
UNIT PAVERS/INTERLOCK TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.
b.
c.
d.
E.
F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
2.
3.
Sub grade: Grade and compact the sub grade to the required elevation.
Reduce high spots and raise low spots to grade with approved compacted
materials.
Setting Bed: Spread bedding sand, on compacted sub grade, and compact to
the thickness shown to achieve an even, accurate surface, at proper elevation,
for the pavers and blocks.
Pavers and Blocks:
a.
Set the pavers and blocks on the setting bed and work into place so as
to provide total bearing of the setting bed, without voids under the
pavers and blocks.
b.
Set pavers in the pattern shown with uniform open joints of the size
shown. If joint width is not shown provide 10mm wide joints.
c.
d.
e.
Set Interlocking blocks in the pattern shown with close joints and grout
the joints with fine sand.
f.
g.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02780-3
UNIT PAVERS/INTERLOCK TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
h.
3.02
PROTECTION
A.
Clean and protect finished work from damage due to subsequent building operations.
Do not permit vehicular traffic on finished work.
END OF SECTION 02780
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02780-4
UNIT PAVERS/INTERLOCK TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02820
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.02
STANDARDS
A.
he fence and gate except as otherwise shown or specified, shall comply with
the following codes, specification, and standards.
1. AASHTO M-181: Chain Link Fence.
2. BS 1722 PART 1: Specification for Chain Link Fences.
3. FS RR-F-191/1B, 3B, and 4B: Fencing, Wire and Posts Metal (Chain Link Fence
Fabric, Posts, Top Rails, Braces and Accessories) Detail Specifications.
4. ASTM A116: Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire
Fence Fabric.
5. ASTM A120: Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
6. ASTM A123: Specification for Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products
Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and
Strip.
7. ASTM A153: Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
8. ASTM A513: Specification for Square Steel Tube.
9. ASTM F668: Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Coated Steel chain
Link Fence Fabric.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02820-1
FENCE AND GATE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the
purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality
to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable, subject to the
Engineers approval.
B.
2.02
A.
Mesh and Gauge: Provide chain link fabric, in one-piece widths, height as
shown on the Drawings with 6 gauge (4.88mm) wires and 50 x 50 mm mesh.
Top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed.
B.
C.
1.
End and Line (Intermediate) Posts: Provide end and line posts of the minimum
sizes and weights as follows:
a.
48.3mm O.D. pipe weighing 4.05 Kg/lin.m.
3.
Brace Rails: Provide brace rails between posts where shown on the Drawings,
consisting of 42.2mm O.D. pipe weighing 3.38 Kg/lin.m.
4.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02820-2
FENCE AND GATE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Wire Ties: Provide tie wire consisting of galvanized 9 gauge (3.76mm) wire
coated to match fabric.
a.
Use for tying fabric to line posts at 350mm centers.
6.
Hog Rings: Provide hog rings of galvanized 9 gauge (3.76mm) wire coated to match
fabric.
a.
Use for tying fabric to tension wire at 500mm centers.
7.
Post Tops: Provide weather tight closure cap with loop to receive tension wire; one
cap for each post. Coat cap to match fabric.
8.
Stretcher Bars and Bands: One piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with a
minimum cross-section of 5mm x 20mm. Provide one stretcher bar for each end
post. Secure bars to end posts with bands spaced not more than 375mm centers.
D.
1.
Miscellaneous Materials
Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of sulphate resisting cement.
Provide all concrete work as specified in relevant Concrete Section Specifications as
applicable.
Gates
1. Steel gates (as shown in the drawing) shall be either Swing or Sliding type as
shown in the drawing.. Frames shall be 150 x 150 mm and 100 x 50 mm steel
box sections conforming to ASTM-A513.
Picket dimensions and spacing shall be 6 x 50 mm flats. All standard mounting
hardware, including locks and latches, wheels and drop bolts shall be supplied.
Gates shall be manually operated.
2. Chain link gate (as shown in the drawing) shall be of swing type, comprising of
50mm diameter vertical, horizontal and cross frame and 50 x 50 mm diamond
mesh infill panels. Frames shall be 100 x 150 mm hollow metal box section
conforming to ASTM-A513 including all standard mounting hardware, including l
locks and latches, wheels, drop bolts. The gate shall be similar in shape to the
existing one. Gate shall be manually operated.
B.
Coatings
1. All panels, gates and hardware shall be coated in a similar fashion after
fabrication and surface preparation of no less than SS PC-SP 2-63, hand tool
cleaning or SS PC-SP-3-43, power tool cleaning followed by coating of iron
phosphate, using one of the following methods:
a. Zinc chromate gloss enamel applied electro-statically to provide a uniform 2layer coating with a minimum 1.5 mil. Dry film thickness.
b. Electrostatically applied UL approved resin base fusion bonded polyester
with a minimum 3 mil. Film thickness.
c. The above coatings shall be applied after hot dip galvanizing with a minimum
of 1.2 ounces of zinc per square foot as per ASTM-A90.
2. All panels, gates and hardware shall be spray coated with a high quality rustinhibiting metal paint. Contractor to submit color samples to match building
cladding to be approved by the Engineer.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02820-3
FENCE AND GATE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
General: Do not begin fence installation and erection before the final grading
is completed, with finish elevations established, unless otherwise permitted by
the Engineer.
B.
Excavation: Excavate holes of sizes and spacing shown, for post footings in
firm, undisturbed, or compacted soil.
C.
Setting Posts: Remove all loose and foreign materials from sides and bottoms
of holes, and moisten soil prior to placing concrete.
1.
Center and align posts in holes 75mm above bottom of excavation.
2.
Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour, and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and
hold in position during placement and finishing operations.
3.
Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct water away from
posts.
4.
Keep exposed concrete surfaces moist for at least 7 days after placement, or
cure with membrane curing material, or other acceptable curing method.
D.
Concrete Strength: Allow concrete to attain at least 75% of its minimum 28-day
characteristic cube strength, but in no case sooner than 7 days after placement,
before tension wires or fabric are installed. Do not stretch and tension fabric and
wires until the concrete has attained its full design strength.
E.
Brace Rails: Provide brace rails where shown. Install in one piece between posts
and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary.
F.
Tension Wire: Install tension wires, if required, through loops in the posts before
stretching fabric and tie to each post with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire.
Fasten fabric to tension wire using 9 gauge galvanized steel hog rings spaced
500mm centers.
G.
Fabric: Leave approximately 200mm between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull
fabric taught and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor fabric to framework so
that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released.
H.
Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric at 100mm centers, and secure to
posts with metal bands spaced at 375mm centers.
I.
Tie Wires: Use U-shapes wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached,
clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns.
Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. Space tie wires at
350mm centers.
3.02
INSTALLATION OF GATE
A.
General: Job site shall be cleared of excess spillage of concrete, spent welding
equipment, packaging, and other debris. No work is to begin prior to final grading,
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02820-4
FENCE AND GATE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Frames, Pickets and Rails: Frames and pickets shall be installed truly vertical
and all rails shall be truly horizontal.
C.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02820-5
FENCE AND GATE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK
A.
B.
The supply, installation and maintenance of planting soil mix, drainage layers to
planting areas on grade as shown on the drawings.
B.
The supply, transportation, planting and maintenance of vines, palms, trees, shrubs,
groundcovers and grass where planting is scheduled in the drawings and specifications.
C.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
American Joint
Names(AJCHN)
Committee
on
Horticulture
Nomenclature
Standardized
Plant
B.
American National Standards Institute Z60 1 (ANSI), 1980, American standard for
Nursery Stock.
C.
D.
Sunset Western Garden Book 4th Edition, Lane Publishing Co., Menlo Park, CA,
USA.
E.
Hortus Third, staff of Bailey Hortorium, Macmillan Publishing Co. Inc., New York,
USA.
F.
Landscape Plants in the United Arab Emirates, by Teresa Kwei and Tony Esmonde,
1978 published by Teresa Kwei.
G.
H.
I.
J.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-1
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples:
1. Submit samples of the following in accordance with Section 01340.
a. Agricultural Soil: 1 Kg.
b. Organic Soil Amendments; 1 Kg of each specified.
c. Inorganic Soil Amendments; 1 Kg of each specified.
d. Drainage store: 0.25 cubic meter.
e. Water: samples of landscape water in use shall be submitted to
Engineer as required for suitability analysis of irrigation water.
f. Sand, Soil Mixes, and Organic Amendments: Samples of sand, soil mixes
and organic materials shall be submitted to the Engineer as required.
2. Allow 14 calendar days for Engineers review.
B.
Manufacturers Literature:
1. Manufacturers literature and labels for the following materials shall be
submitted:
a. Fertilizer.
b. Pesticide.
c. Anti-desiccant.
C.
Test Reports:
Test shall be based on a representative sample of material to be used.
Submit reports to the Engineer. Do not use materials until reviewed by the Engineer.
Material used in construction shall be the same as that reviewed in testing. The
Testing shall be performed by an authorized testing laboratory accepted by the
Engineer and all cost for this work shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
a. Agricultural soil. The following information is required.
1. Mechanical analysis.
2. Sodium absorption ratio (SAR) expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C.
3. Electrical conductivity expressed in ohms/cm @ 25 degrees C.
4. PH
5. Boron content expressed in milligrams per liter.
b. Organic soil amendment the following information is required:
1. pH.
2. Loss of weight by ignition expressed as a percentage of ash content
Compared to the oven dry weight of the peat moss.
3. Moisture absorption capacity expressed as a percentage by weight as
compared to the oven dry weight of the peat moss.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-2
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Certificates of Inspection:
1.
Certificates of inspection shall accompany the invoice for each shipment of plants as
may be required by law for transportation. File certificates with Engineer prior to
acceptance of the material.
Perform work with personnel experienced in the work required of this Section under
direction of a skilled and qualified foreman.
B.
Substitutions:
1. When material or plants of the species specified are not available, substitution
may be made only with the written approval of the Engineer.
1.06
A.
1.
Notify the Engineer 14 calendar days in advance of time and manner of delivery
of plants.
Immediately before shipping all plants in partial or full leaf shall be sprayed with antidesiccant, applying an adequate film over trunk, branches, twigs and/or foliage.
Plants shall be prepared for shipment in a manner that shall not cause damage
to the branches, shape and future development of the plants after planting.
2.
3.
B. General:
1.
All plant material shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic,
seasonal or breakage injuries during transit.
2.
3.
Containerized plants shall not have their containers broken or their root system
cracked or damaged in any way.
4.
Upon arrival, plants will be inspected for proper transit procedures. Should the
roots be dried out, large branches be broken, balls of earth be broken, or loosened, or
areas of bark be torn, or should the plant have desiccation, leaf shredding, diseases,
insect eggs, insect infestation, frost damage, damage from browsing or grazing, the
Engineer will reject the injured plant(s).
1.07
ACCEPTANCE
A.
The Engineer will inspect plant material upon delivery to the site.
Upon acceptance of the plant material as to the correct species, qualities and
condition, written approval will be given and notice to proceed.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-3
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
1.08
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one year warranty from Date of Substantial Completion under provisions of
General Conditions of Contract.
Replace plant materials found not in a healthy growing condition.
Replacements: Plant materials of same size and species at the time of replacement with
a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
B.
C.
1.09
AINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Begin maintenance of plant materials immediately after planting and continue until
termination of warranty period.
Maintenance shall be including measures necessary to establish and maintain plants in
a vigorous and healthy growing condition. Include the following:
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. When herbicides are used for
weed control, apply in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Remedy
damage resulting from use of herbicides.
Watering sufficient to saturate root system.
Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches and treatment of prune
wounds.
Disease and insect control.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANT MATERIALS
A. Selection of Plants:
1.
Locate and tag the plant material in the Plant List. Tag plants provided that the
quantity of any one species is less than 50 units. Where more than 50 units of
one species are specified, tag 10% of the required number as Sample Plants
and all plants of this species delivered to the job shall match the quality of the
sample.
2.
Once having located the material in the nursery(s), notify the Engineer in writing 14
calendar days prior to digging or assembling plant materials for shipping.
B. Reference :
1.
Nomenclature: Plant names shall agree with the nomenclature of the references
listed in 1.03 of this Section. Names of varieties not listed therein shall conform
generally with names accepted in the nursery trade.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-4
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3.
Groundcovers.
Shall be healthy, vigorous, well formed and free of diseases.
4.
Grass Stolons
Grass stolons shall be fresh living sections of rhizomes and having nodes which will
produce growth when properly planted and maintained. Stolons shall be grown from
high quality vegetative material in soil treated with approved pesticides, and be free
of diseases, insects, and weeds or weed seed.
2.02
PLANTING MEDIUM
A.
1.
Agricultural Soil:
Soil shall be obtained from well-drained arable land. It shall be free draining
and non- toxic. Soil shall not contain calcium carbonate subsoil, excessive
boron, refuse, roots, heavy clay, clods, noxious seeds, phytotoxic materials,
rocks, sticks or litter.
2.
Soil shall be agricultural soil obtained from a source approved by the Engineer
following testing and inspection of a representative sample. A sample load of
approved agricultural soil shall be retained on the site until the end of the agricultural
soil filling operations for comparison with subsequent deliveries.
3.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-5
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Chemical Characteristics:
1. Salinity (ECe x 10^3) less than 4
2. SAR (Sodium adsorption Ratio) less than 6
3. Boron (Saturation Extract) less than 1.5 ppm
4. pH less than 8.5
B.
ANTI - DESICCANT
A.
2.04
HERBICIDE
A.
2.05
MULCH
A.
2.06
EDGING
A.
Plastic PVC Edging 6mm thick by 150mm deep by 6m lengths with connecting
metal.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-6
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
2.07
STAKES / TIES
A.
Tree stakes shall be of wood free of knots, straight of a size 5cm x 5cm square of
lengths as indicated on drawings.
B.
Tree ties shall be of 12 gauge G.I. wire and reinforced rubber hose. 3 ties shall be
used per tree.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
Prior to any plantation works, locate, inspect, mark, and protect all site utilities,
structures, irrigation equipment and piping, and existing vegetation during work.
B.
Paving and other work installed under other sections of this specification, shall be kept
clean and free of soil, and other materials incidental to this work.
C.
Provide such barricades, temporary fencing, signs or policing as may be necessary for
the protection of all planted areas until they are accepted.
B.
Plant only when weather and soil conditions are in accordance with locally accepted
practice.
3.03
A.
The planting soil mix for both Agricultural and Bio-remediated soil shall be:
1. Agricultural or Bio-remediated Soil 70%
2. Organic Soil Amendment 30% (Peat Moss)
3. 1Kg soil sulphur per M3
4. 2.3 Kg/cu meter NPK 15 15 15 + Fe + Fe compound fertilizer.
5. Gro Power @ 70 Kg per 100 M2
6. Gypsum as per soils test
7. Wetting agent as per soils test
B.
C.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-7
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
A.
The planting soil shall be placed in planting areas and compacted using water
saturation to the full mix depth. The area shall be leveled to within plus or minus
50mm and then again be thoroughly irrigated with water to eliminate air pockets and
settle soil. The soil shall be evenly moistened to a depth of 300mm. After the irrigation
system has been installed, re-compact and settle all disturbed areas and fine grade to a
smooth continuous grade. There shall be no uneven surfaces greater than plus or minus
15mm.
B.
After a period of ten days, all germinating weeds shall be removed from the area and
the soil shall be re-leveled to form a smooth continuous grade.
3.05
A.
When planting areas are ready to receive plants, stakes shall be driven in tree and
shrub locations. Shrub and groundcover plants rows shall be marked and
Coordinated with tree locations.
B.
Give the Engineer 7 calendar days notice in writing before the inspection of staking.
3.06
INSTALLATION OF PLANTS.
A.
General
1.
Planting operation shall be confined to one area at a time. The object being to
prepare, plant and finish each landscape area in one operation complete with its own
functioning irrigation system.
Move and handle plants by container or root ball. Large Palms and Trees which are
moved by crane or front end loader must be protected so as not to damage the rootball,
trunk, branches or fronds.
Plant containers shall be cut off all container grown plants and removed
Set the plants at the same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the
ground from which they were dug or soil level in their container except palms.
Water all plants immediately after planting.
Immediately after planting, all plant material shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant,
applying an adequate film over trunks, branches, twigs and/or foliage.
Cut ropes or strings from the tops of all plants after plant has been set, except palms.
Apply shredded bark mulch where shown to a depth as specified in drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-8
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
Set all planting plumb and brace trees and shrubs rigidly in position until the planting soil
mix has been consolidated around rootball by water settlement.
When planting, water thoroughly and lightly tamp to eliminate all air pockets in the
planting soil mix.
Apply slow release planting tablets evenly in tree, palm, shrub and groundcover pits
below soil level as recommended by the manufacturer at the following rates:
a. 1 gallon plants : 1 tablet
b. 5 gallon plants : 3 tablets
c. 3 meter palms : 9 tablets
4.
Groundcover and small shrubs shall be planted in neat rows with triangular spacing as
shown on the drawings.
D.
1.
2.
Grass Stolons
Grass stolons shall be installed the same day as delivery to the site.
Stolons should be spread over the prepared area at a rate of 8 bushels per 95
square meters and planted 12mm into the soil by means of a stolon crimper, by hand,
or other piece of approved equipment. It shall then be rolled and leveled in the event of
low spots.
Immediately after planting, the area shall be irrigated until the top 80mm is wetted. The
planting soil must be keep damp at all times until the stolons show signs of significant
growth.
3.
3.07
PVC EDGING
A.
Install PVC Edging between all shrub beds and lawn areas as indicated on plans
prior to planting.
B.
3.08
PRUNING
A.
Pruning shall be done after planting and staking operations are complete.
B.
C.
D.
E.
All saw cuts on branches larger than 2cm. to be made with 3 cuts; i.e. undercut, stub
cutoff and final cut.
F.
Only clean sharp proper tools shall be used. Do not use pruning shears where
loppers are required or loppers where a pruning saw is required.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-9
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________________
3.09
MAINTENANCE
A.
Furnish and supply all materials, equipment and labor for maintenance of all
landscape areas and irrigation installed as part of this contract.
B.
The work shall include but not be limited to mowing, weed control, Insect control,
disease control, pruning, replacement of substandard or dead plant material and
maintenance of the irrigation system in full working order at all times. All
maintenance shall be coordinated with the Owner.
C.
D.
Perform all work in a manner to comply with the original installation specifications.
E.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/02900-10
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORM WORK
PART- 1: GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with the design,
fabrication, erection and striking of formwork.
B.
The responsibility for the design, fabrication, erection, striking, safety and adequacy of
the whole of the formwork shall rest entirely with the Contractor
1.02
REFERANCE STANDARDS:
A.
The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as
further cited herein:
American Concrete Institute ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete
Formwork and chapter V, ACI 318 except where more stringent standards are
required by this specification or are shown on the drawings.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
1.04
COORDINATION:
A.
The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of other
sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this
section before the installation of items herein.
1.05
DESIGN CRITERIA:
A.
B.
C.
________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE FORM WORK
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03100-1
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
6.
7.
8.
9.
Texture of finish
Concrete density
The worst combination of :
a.
Formwork forces
b.
Reinforcement weight
c.
Wet concrete weight
d.
Incidental dynamic effects caused by placing, vibrating and
compacting concrete.
e.
The use of externally applied vibrators.
Methods of concrete discharge.
D.
Design formwork to be :
a.
Sufficiently rigid to maintain the correct position shape and profile.
b.
Demountable without shock, disturbance or damage to concrete.
Formwork properly supported on shoring and ties shall be capable of
being retained in position during concrete maturing period.
E.
Adjustable steel ties, supports and shoring shall allow form boards and framework to
be accurately adjusted to line and level.
F.
End forms or bulkheads shall be rigid enough to prevent distortion during placing and
compaction of the concrete and shall be securely fastened. Holes or slots shall be
plugged or sealed to prevent grout leakage.
1.06
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Samples:
1) Submit samples of all materials proposed for use in formwork.
2) Submit all other information requested by the Engineer.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings of formwork design, including plans and sections, and
proposals or jetting and lifting arrangements.
Scales of shop drawings :
i.
Details 1:1, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20.
ii.
Construction 1:5, 1:100
iii.
Layout and Site Plan 1:100 or 1:200
2. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineer's review of shop drawings.
________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE FORM WORK
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03100-2
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
FORMWORK MATERIALS
Forms shall be of a suitable permanent type such as metal or plastic. Wood forms may
be used for short runs of special shapes but should be constructed to produce work of
a quality equal to that produced by the permanent forms. A concrete foundation for
the casting bed shall be provided. All forms for precast must be constructed to permit
movement of the member without damage during lifting, handling, transporting and
storing. In case wood
forms are used, exterior type Douglas Fir Grade B-B
(Concrete Form) plywood minimum 19mm thickness shall be used or approved equal.
Before reusing forms, nails shall be withdrawn and the surfaces in contact with
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
otherwise forms shall be water and moisture tight to the Engineers satisfaction.
Offsets at form joints due to misalignment or open joints should avoid.
2.02
FORM COATING
A.
B.P. CCM-3 (British Petroleum) or B.P. CM-3 (R) (V Petroleum) or Calform (Caltex)
or form wax of a type which does not impart any stain to concrete nor interfere with
the
adhesion of any finish, sealant, or waterproofing material applied to concrete
surface.
2.03
FORM TIES
1.
Factories fabricated adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form tie
designed to prevent form deflection and bulging.
2.
For surfaces exposed in finished work use tie screws with removable plastic
cones, removable bolts, special removable ties, tie wires or Series 300
stainless steel snap ties.
3.
For all other forms, either bolts or wires may be used. Use sties of such type
that when forms are removed, no metal is closer than 40 mm from the
finished concrete surface.
2.04.
A.
2.05
TAPES
A.
Tapes for sealing joints of formwork panels for smooth finished concrete shall be
plastic faced adhesive type to the approval of the Engineer. Any tape marks left on
concrete surfaces shall be removed.
________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE FORM WORK
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03100-3
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PART-3: EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Forms shall conform to the lines, dimensions and shapes of concrete shown,
providing for openings, keys, slots, projections as required.
B.
C.
Location of joints for plywood facing to be submitted for review by the Engineer.
3.02
ERECTION
A.
Supports: Props and supports shall be, sufficiently strong to support the entire
construction load. Supports shall in all cases be in accordance with the formwork
design approved by the Engineer
B.
Ties: Position of ties to be strictly as per approved shop drawings, especially for
exposed concrete surfaces and in all cases the approval of the Engineer must be
obtained prior to construction.
C.
Release Agents :
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fillets :
Install fillets at all interior right angle junctions in the formwork.
3.03
STRIKING
A.
3.04
FORM CLEANING
A.
All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before placement of concrete and suitable
temporary openings provided to permit removal of undesirable materials from the
interior without disturbing the whole formwork. All surfaces in contact with concrete
shall be wetted or treated with and approved form releasing agent before placing of
reinforcement. All formwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of any old concrete or any
other deposit before re-use.
________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE FORM WORK
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03100-4
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Ensure that during concreting, formwork and supports are inspected by experienced
workers and that any portion which shows signs of sagging or displacement is
straightened.
________________________________________________________________________________
CONCRETE FORM WORK
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03100-5
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART- 1: GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with steel bar
reinforcement.
1.02
REFERANCE STANDARDS:
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as
further cited herein:
ACI 315
ACI 318
ASTM A-185
ASTM A-497
ASTM A-615
AWS DI.4
BS 4449
BS 4466
BS 4483
BS 5135
SSPC-SP-10
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Supervisory staff shall have at least the qualification and experience to meet the
requirements of this Specification.
B.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.04
CO-ORDINATION
A.
The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of other
sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades, which adjoin materials of this
section before the installation of items herein.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Provide cut lengths of reinforcing as requested by the Engineer for testing or
evaluation by the Testing Laboratory.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detail and placement drawings for all reinforcing steel which
are correlated with foaming and concrete placement techniques and requirements.
a. Reinforcing shall be detailed based on construction joint locations, which
have been shown on shop drawings reviewed by the Engineer.
b. The drawings shall be in such detail as to ensure that there will be a
minimum, if any, of difficulties in execution of the work in the field.
c. The drawings shall consist of sections, plans and details clearly showing
locations, sizes and spacing of all reinforcing steel, supporting bars and
accessories. Include schedules and diagrams to indicate bends, sizes and
lengths of all reinforcing steel bars.
d. A separate set of shop drawings, which shows the construction joint
locations, shall show all floor openings, wall opening and edges of
concrete. Floor openings, wall openings and sleeves for all mechanical,
plumbing and electrical work shall be coordinated with the respective
trades and shown on these shop drawings in accordance with the criteria
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
e. No work shall be fabricated until both sets of shop drawings (Reinforcing
Steel and Concrete Dimensions) have been reviewed by the Engineer
(with corrections and re-submittals as required by the Contract
Documents). After review by the Engineer, furnish all copies needed for
fabrication and erection, and for use of other trades.
f.
Be fully responsible for furnishing and installing all materials called for or
required by the Contract Documents even though these materials may
have been omitted from the reviewed shop drawings.
g. Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineers review of shop drawings.
C.
Certificates :
a. Submit for each consignment from each source a certificate verifying
compliance with this specification.
b. Submit Reinforcement Manufacturers routine test records.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 2
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
A.
Before any order is placed by the Contractor, he shall notify the Engineer of the
prime source of supply where the reinforcement is drawn of rolled. The Contractor
shall ensure that all steel delivered to the site shall come from the source accepted
by the Engineer. Merchants and stockholders will not be an acceptable source
unless it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the whole of the
reinforcement applied to the contract complies with this Specification
B.
All batches of reinforcement in which unacceptable material has been mixed with
acceptable material shall be rejected and shall be removed from the site forthwith.
C.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
BAR REINFORCEMET
A.
Bar reinforcement shall be hot rolled high yielding deformed bars complying with
ASTM A-615 Grade 60 with minimum yield strength of FY. 4200 Kg. /cm2.
B.
Mesh reinforcement and wrapping fabric shall comply with ASTM A-497 with
minimum ultimate tensile strength of 4200 Kg./cm2.
C.
2.02
BAR SUPPORTS :
A.
Spacer blocks with cast in tie wire may be used with written agreement of the
Engineer for support of the bottom layer of reinforcing in the foundations and slab on
grade only. The blocks shall be of minimum size and made from cement sand small
aggregate mix to match surrounding concrete strength appearance and durability.
B.
Other spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable, not lead
to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spoiling of the concrete cover.
The type of spacers acceptable shall be one of the following, subject to approval
be Engineer
1.
High density plastic.
2.
Hot-dipped galvanized bar supports with plastic feet.
3.
Stainless Steel.
2.03
TIE WIRE :
A.
Shall be annealed iron wire not less than No. 16 gauge or approved fasteners,
unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 3
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
2.04.
A.
Tests will be required by the Engineer on steel reinforcement and they shall be
carried out in strict accordance with the provisions of BS 18 Part 2 in addition to
MPW Standards and Specifications.
B.
Tensile tests providing information on elastic limit, ultimate strength, and stress-strain
curve will be required from each delivery of reinforcement and measurements will
also be required of cross-sectional area and deformation/bond characteristics of
deformed bars.
C.
The Contractor is to allow for tensile and bound tests, at his own cost, for each size
of bar to be used in the concrete construction.
D.
Test results for each bar size shall be submitted to the Engineer three (3) weeks
before concrete work commences on Site. Tests will be carried out at the discretion
of the Engineer from time to time.
E.
Further tests may be called for when the source of supply of reinforcement changes
in which case the cost of such extra testing will be borne by the Contractor. When
any test results do not conform to the relevant standard the reinforcement steel shall
be removed from the site and the cost of subsequent testing and any remedial work
shall be borne by the Contractor.
PART-3: EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall supply and incorporate in the work such steel reinforcement
including tie wire, support and spacer bars and the like whether shown or not shown
on the drawings which are necessary to complete the work, all to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
B.
The Contractor shall check his bending schedules against the latest drawings and
any discrepancy must be immediately referred to the Engineer. The Contractor is
responsible for ordering all materials required to complete the job according to
normal good practice and to the approval of the Engineer.
C.
Store all reinforcement under cover to avoid contact with the ground, moisture, dust
and salts and to avoid distortion once bent to shape. Improper storage will be
sufficient cause for rejection of reinforcement.
D.
All steel, before being placed in position, shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose rust,
scale and any other coating. If reinforcement has been badly rusted or potted it will
be rejected. Mechanical brushes shall be used in cleaning the steel bars
E.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 4
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Ends of bars which are left projecting for any period exceeding 4 weeks shall be
painted with a heavy coat of neat cement grout which shall be removed prior to
continuation of concreting.
G.
H.
Reinforcement that has in any way been previously used shall not be used in the
work.
3.02.
A.
All reinforcement bars shall be cut and bent to shape as per the approved bar
bending schedule. All bars shall be tagged showing the corresponding bar number
as shown on the relevant bar bending schedule.
B.
Reinforcement shall be cut and/or bent in accordance with B.S 4466 or ACI 315.
C.
D.
3.03
SPLICES:
A.
The splice lengths of all reinforcing bars which have to be spliced shall be in
accordance with AC 1318.
B.
Splices shall be staggered to the approval of the Engineer, and the fabric shall be
securely tied layer to layer.
C.
Bars shall have minimum anchorage and lap lengths in accordance with ACI 318
requirements unless otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents.
3.04
ERECTION:
A.
Give the Engineer at least 24 hours notice before commencing fixing reinforcement
to allow inspection of formwork.
B.
Ensure that spaces to receive reinforcement are clean and free from debris.
C.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 5
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Comply with BS 8110, Section 7, and Para. 7.3 to ACI Standard 301, Chapter 5,
Para. 5.5. Reinforcement to be secured against displacement out side the specified
limits unless specified otherwise. Cover shall be clear cover as shown on the
drawings.
E.
Spacer chairs or other supports detailed on the drawings, together with such other
supports as may be necessary shall be used to maintain the reinforcement in its
correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is dimensioned to the links,
spacers between the links and formwork shall be of the same dimension as the
nominal cover. Spacers shall be of such materials and designs as will be durable,
not lead to corrosion of the reinforcement and not cause spalling or the concrete
cover.
Non-structural connections for the positioning of reinforcement shall be made with
steel wire or tying devices. Care shall be taken to ensure that the projection ends o
ties or clips do not encroach into concrete cover.
The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting,
particular attention being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever
sections.
F.
G.
Laps and Joints of Reinforcement: Laps and joints shall only be made by methods
specified and at the positions shown on the drawings or as agreed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 03200
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03200- 6
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B.
This specification section shall govern all cast-in-place concrete work for
the complete project except where more stringent or specialized
requirements are indicated. All work shall be performed to secure for the
entire project homogeneous concrete having the required strength, surface
finish, materials, durability, and weathering resistance, without planes of
weakness or other structural defects, and free of honey combs, air pockets,
voids, projections, offsets of plane and other defacements of concrete. The
Contractor will be fully responsible for any defects or damage in the
building arising from faulty materials or workmanship and the cost of
remedial measures in order to ensure that the completed work complies
with the Contract Documents.
C.
D.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following
Agencies as further cited herein:
BS 12
Portland cement.
BS 410
Test Sieves
BS 882
Aggregates from natural sources
BS 1305
Batch type concrete mixers
BS 2539
Preferred dimensions of R.C. structural members
BS 3148
Tests for water for making concrete
BS 3797
Light-weight aggregates for concrete
BS 4027
Sulphate Resisting Portland cement
BS 4251
Truck type concrete mixers
BS 4254
Sealants
BS 4550
Methods of Testing Cement
BS 5075
Concrete admixtures
BS 5328
Methods of specifying concrete, including ready-mixed
concrete
BS 5337
Code of Practice for structural use of Concrete for retaining
aqueous liquids
BS 5606
Code of Practice for accuracy in building
BS 8110
Part 1: 1985 Code of Practice for the Structural use of
concrete
ACI 117
Code of Practice for Accuracy in Building
ACI 211.1
Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,
and Mass Concrete
ACI 301
Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 304
Recommended
Practices
for
Measuring,
Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete
ACI 305
Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 309
Consolidation of Concrete
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
AASHTO M148 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
AASHTO M182 Burlap Cloth Made From Jute or Kenaf
ASTM C31
Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field
ASTM C33
Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39
Compressive strength of cylindrical concrete specimens
ASTM C40
Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for
Concrete
ASTM C88
Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
Sodium Sulphate or Magnesium Sulphate
ASTM C94
Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C114 Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C117 Test Method for Material Finer Than 75-um (No.200) Sieve
in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
ASTM C125
ASTM C131
ASTM C138
ASTM C142
ASTM C143
ASTM C150
ASTM C156
ASTM C171
ASTM C227
ASTM C231
published
by
US
Department
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
of
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.03
DEFINITIONS :
A.
B.
1.04
QUALITY CONTROL :
A.
C.
D.
Target Mean Strength: The concrete mix shall have at least the
required minimum cement content and mean strength greater than
the required characteristic strength by at least the current margin.
The current margin shall be taken as the lesser of:
a.
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
Required
Average
Compressive
Strength
N/mm2
(Target
mean
Strength)
fc + 8.5 N/mm2
Over 35 N/mm2
fc + 10 N/mm2
3.
4.
Trial Mixes :
a. Where trial mixes are requested by the Engineer, three separate
batches of concrete shall be made using materials likely to be
typical of the proposed supply and preferably under full scale
production conditions. If circumstances make this inconvenient
the batches may be mixed in the laboratory only if approved by
the Engineer.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
E.
2.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a.
b.
c.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
F.
c.
d.
f.
g.
h.
8.
9.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
not generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18% when
based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when based on
tests on 100 separate batches, or less than 5% when based on tests on
500 separate batches. This recalculated margin, if adopted, becomes the
current margin for the judgment of compliance with the specified
characteristic strength of concrete.
G.
Testing Plan :
1.
2.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
b.
c.
d.
3.
1.05
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING :
A.
B.
Prior to this meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all
pertinent information including written procedural outlines, description of
forming systems, brochures of proposed equipment, sources of all
materials and characteristics of all materials. The above information shall
be received by Engineer at least 30 days prior to the pre-construction
meeting.
C.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-10
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Samples:
1.
2.
3.
B.
C.
Test Reports:
Submit preliminary test results for the Engineers approval at least
three weeks prior to the beginning of the works. In addition to the
test reports specified under Section Clause 1.05C, submit the
following directly to the Engineer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed fabrication and placement drawings for all
formwork and reinforcing steel which are correlated with forming and
concrete placement techniques and requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-11
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
7.
8.
9.
Allow fourteen (14) days for the Engineers review of the shop
drawings.
1.07
A.
Delivery:
1.
Cement: Deliver in the original sealed and branded bags, or in the
manufacturers containers, in batches not exceeding 100 tones.
2.
Ready-mix Concrete: Delivery ticket shall record the actual batched
weight of ingredients and the time of addition of water.
B.
Storage:
1.
Cement : Store off the ground, stacking each batch separately, and
use in order of delivery. Do not use cement that is more than 12
months old.
C.
2.
Aggregate :
a.
Store in suitable bins with a canopy cover, on a selfdraining concrete base.
b.
Segregate with suitable dividers.
c.
Stockpile coarse aggregate in three separate grading
(Note: Stockpiling is not necessary where a crushing
screening plant is used in tandem with a batching plant):
1. 40 20mm
2. 20 10mm
3. 10 5mm
3.
Store
in
accordance
with
Handling:
Ready-mixed concrete: Discharge trucks within the approved period after
addition of water to cement.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-12
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.08
JOB CONDITIONS:
A.
1.09
1.
2.
CO-ORDINATION
A. The work of this section shall be completely co-coordinated with the work of
other sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades which adjoin
materials of this section before the installation of items herein.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
The products and manufacturers specified herein are specified for the
purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in
quality to, or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable.
The decision of acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Cement :
1.
Alkali Content : Maximum 0.6% equivalent of Sodium Oxide or
certify that no alkali reactivity is produced with the proposed cement
aggregate combinations (ASTM C-227).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-13
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
B.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Aggregates
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-14
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.
7.
The grading of each size of aggregate from each pit, quarry or other
sources of supply shall be determined at least once weekly. The
results of such tests shall be reported to the Engineer and shall be
used to check whether the grading are similar to those of the
samples used in the establishment of the batch weight used.
8.
9.
10.
All aggregates shall be screened and washed and shall have less
than the following maximum salt contents as acid soluble chlorides
and sulphates. The table also shows the maximum salt content
allowed in the mixed concrete.
Chlorides
Sulphates
0.06
0.4
0.03
0.4
0.1(OPC)
4.0
0.2 (SRPC)
___________________________________________________________
11.
b.
Fineness modulus shall not vary more than 0.20 from value
used in establishing mix proportions. If greater deviation, the
use of such aggregates shall be discontinued until suitable
adjustments in mix proportions can be made and reviewed.
Sodium Sulphate Soundness: Max. 6 percent loss, ASTM C-
c.
88, 5 cycles.
d.
e.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-15
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
f.
95-100
No.8 (2.36 mm)
80-100
No.16 (1.18mm)
50-85
No.30 (0.60 mm)
25-60
No.50 (0.30 mm)
15-30
No.100 (0.15 mm)
3-10
No.200 (0.075 mm)
0-5
Other gradations not meeting the above requirements may be
permitted upon submission of relevant data and review by the
Engineer.
g.
12.
Fine aggregates shall be free of organic materials (ASTM C40) and other foreign matter.
13.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-16
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
h.
Size of Sieve
Opening (Square Opening)
2
1 (37.5 mm)
1 (25.4 mm)
3/4" (19.0 mm)
1/2" (12.7 mm)
3/8 (9.5 mm)
No.4 (4.75 mm)
No.8 (2.36 mm)
Percentage by Weight
Passing ASTM C-33
1
1
(37.5mm)
(25.4mm)
Size
Size
(50.0mm)
95-100
60-85
35-70
20-50
10-30
0-5
-
100
100
95-100
60-85
25-60
15-45
0 -10
0-5
(19.0mm)
Size
100
95-100
60-75
20-55
0-10
0-6
Water:
1.
Water for washing aggregates and for mixing of concrete shall be
clean, fresh and free of harmful matter such as oil, salts, acids,
alkali, sewage, deleterious minerals or organic matter. Water shall
be filtered to remove any colour or residues present due to
contamination from water piping or transportation or storage
methods.
2.
Water shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328.
3.
Water shall be tested in accordance with BS 3148.
D.
Admixtures:
1.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-17
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-18
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
E.
Curing Materials :
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
G.
Joint Fillers :
1.
Joint Filler shall be a compressed sheet of wood fiber impregnated
with bitumen emulsion complying with ASTM D-1751. The filler may
alternatively be a compressed sheet of cork granules bonded with
bitumen or synthetic resin complying with ASTM D-1752.
2.
The material shall be rot-proof, water-proof, non-absorbent and nonstaining and shall not extrude under pressure or the weight of
poured concrete.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-19
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
H.
Prior to pointing, the joint shall be cleaned and the edge of the filler
tamped down to ensure that the joint is filled completely and
continuous support is provided for the sealant.
Sealant: All sealant shall have good adhesion to the structure and shall
not age, harden or become brittle over a temperature range from 5 Deg. C
to 60 Deg.C. The sealants shall not slump or flow after application is
complete during seasonal contraction and expansion of the joint of upto +
or 12.5% of the joint width. They shall not stain or discolour the adjacent
concrete surfaces and shall be formulated so that any toxic materials
incorporated or generated during curing will not migrate to the surface
where they could be extracted when the sealant has cured.
The colour of sealants shall match the colour of the surrounding finish in
which they are placed and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Sealants for expansion and contraction joints and other outdoor uses shall
be solvent free two component polysulphide (Thiokol) based joint sealing
material consisting of a base containing a liquid polysulphide polymer and
hardener acting as a curing agent as recommended by the manufacturer
for use in the particular location and approved by the Engineer.
Sealant shall comply with B.S. 4254.
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturers technical recommendations
and specifications in respect of adhesion, compatibility, application and
performance for the approval of the Engineer.
A foamed non absorbent polyethylene backing strip or equal shall be used
as a bond breaker.
Sealants shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and used immediately after mixing. A thin brush coat of
primer shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces of the joint and allowed to dry
before application of the sealant.
The sealing compound shall be compacted into the corners of the joints to
ensure that no air pockets are formed.
Masking tape shall be used where the sealant will be exposed. The tape
shall be applied before priming and shall be removed immediately after the
finish tooling and before the sealant begins to cure. A concave profile tool
shall be used to recess the sealant in the joint.
Joints shall not be sealed until any concrete adjacent to the joint is at least
28 days old.
I.
Water stops:
requirements.
i)
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-20
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
a)
b)
ii)
iii)
iv)
The type and size of the water stop shall be suitable to its particular
application as recommended by the manufacturer and be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
J.
K.
L.
Dustproofer Lapidolith
M.
N.
Lightweight Concrete :
1.
2.03
MIXES :
A.
Proportioning of Concrete:
1.
2.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-21
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Classes of Concrete :
CHARACTERISTIC CUBE
STRENGTH @ 28 DAYS
150 Kg./cm2
250 Kg./cm2
350 Kg./cm2
C.
USE
Blinding concrete Mass concrete filling
All reinforced concrete, except columns
Reinforced concrete columns
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-22
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.01
MIXING CONCRETE
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
3.
C.
3.02
A.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-23
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
computing water / cement ratios and care shall be taken to ensure that all
ice has melted before concrete leaves the mixer.
B.
C.
D.
E.
A.
3.
4.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-24
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
5.
6.
7.
Saturate the cleaned surface with water and slush with a coating of
1:1.1/2 cement-sand grout. Place new concrete before grout has
attained its initial set. Clean horizontal construction joints and pour
the cement-sand mortar over joints in walls to a depth of 25mm
before depositing concrete. In walls, do not space construction
joints more than 15 metres apart, unless otherwise shown.
8.
3.04
PLACING CONCRETE:
A.
Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para.8.1 for preparation before
placing and with BS 8110, Section 6, Para 6.5 and 6.8. Notify the Engineer
24 hours before each pour so that the forms and reinforcement may be
examined. Do not place concrete until inspection has been made or
waived.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying
concrete. Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-25
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
G.
H.
Concrete which has achieved its initial set and cannot be properly
compacted shall not be placed in the forms.
I.
J.
K.
3.05
CURING:
A.
General:
1.
2.
Comply with BS8110, Section 6, Para 6.6 and 6.8 & ACI
Standard301,Chapter 12.
The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the
concrete will have satisfactory durability and strength, and the
member will suffer a minimum distortion, be free of excessive
efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage undue cracking in
the structure. Maintain concrete at a suitable temperature so that
the rates of evaporation of moisture from the surfaces are kept to
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-26
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
B.
C.
Curing Methods:
1.
Pounding with Water: Effective for flat surfaces. Curing water shall
not be more than 11 Deg. C. cooler than the concrete to prevent
cracking and shall be free of substances that may stain or discolour
concrete.
2.
3.
4.
When curing concrete with water other than bonding, do not allow
the surface to dry.
5.
Top of columns and walls shall be cured after initial setting. As soon
as formwork is loosened water curing shall be applied to sides to
columns and walls, and shall continue uninterrupted for a minimum
of seven days.
6.
Curing Compounds:
1.
2.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-27
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
D.
Normal Curing Periods: Seven (7) days is the minimum curing period for
all cast-in-place concrete under normal weather conditions (temperatures
around 24 Deg.C. (75 Dec. F) and normal wind speed). This period shall be
extended to a minimum of ten (10) to fourteen (14) days under hot weather
or drying wind conditions.
3.06
TOLERANCES:
A.
Comply with B.S. 5606 or ACI Standard 117-81, Part 5, unless noted
otherwise.
1.
Plumb (allowable variation)
a.
In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers walls, and in
arises:
In any 3m
6 mm
25mm
3.07
COMPACTING CONCRETE:
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, pressure, shock or
other means during the operations of placing and shall be thoroughly
worked around reinforcement, duct formers, embedded fixtures, and into
corners of the formwork to form a solid mass free from voids and having
the required surface finish when the formwork is removed.
Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of
concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and there is no
secretion of ingredients. Care shall be taken that the vibrator is not used
any closer than 75mm from the formed surface.
When directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall demonstrate the
efficiency of the proposed method of compaction on a trial section prior to
the commencement of the permanent works.
When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied
continuously during the placing of each batch of concrete until the
expulsion of air has practically ceased.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-28
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
The number and size of the vibrators shall be such as to ensure vibration
throughout the entire volume of the concrete. They shall be either the
immersion type with a frequency of not less than 100 Hz when operating
submerged in concrete or the exterior type with a frequency of not less than
50 Hz. The vibrators shall be applied systematically and at such intervals
that the zones of influence overlap. The vibrator shall be applied at any
point only for a period that the concrete is properly compacted and not for
so long that segregation occurs.
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally the design of formwork and
disposition of vibrators shall receive special consideration to ensure
efficient compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Except where specifically required by the Engineer, all reinforced concrete
shall be compacted by vibration with plunger (poker) type vibrators.
3.08
FINISHING
A.
B.
C.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-29
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
a.
b.
c.
D.
E.
Insulation
Terrazzo.
F.
3.09
A.
B.
Do not place concrete over vapour barrier until all breaks have been
patched and sealed.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-30
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
DUSTPROOFER
A.
To receive carpeting
3.11
A.
Fill-in :
Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by
other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades
is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown
or required to complete work.
B.
Curbs:
Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and steel-trowelling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with
corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-31
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.12
A.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 25mm in
diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out
holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles.
Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound.
Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 parts
fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough
water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after
bonding compound has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place
and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-32
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
4.
5.
3.13
A.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03300-33
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 03330
ARCHITECTURAL STAMPED CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A.
1.02
A
B
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Qualification of Installers:
1)
Throughout the progress of the work, provide at least one supervisor who shall be
thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and
experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall
direct all work.
2)
Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper execution of this
Section.
3)
C.
Quality Control: Do not begin concrete production until all mix designs have been
reviewed and certified by the Engineer.
D.
E.
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-1
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
F.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, specifications with
application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items,
including Colour Schedule, admixtures, joint systems, and chemical floor hardeners.
B. Shop Drawings:
Submit detail fabrication and placement drawings for all formwork and placement
techniques and requirements.
C. Samples:
1. Provide samples of all materials and concrete accessories for coloured stamped
concrete proposed for use including component parts of prefabricated formwork
systems and manufacturers technical literature relating thereto. Prepare mock-ups and
carry out such tests on the proposed prefabricated formwork systems as may be
required by the Engineer in order that he may be satisfied as to the systems suitability.
D. Test Reports:
Submit preliminary test results for the Engineers approval at least three weeks
prior to the beginning of the work. In addition to the test reports specified under
Quality Control, submit the following directly to the Engineer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.05
A.
Product Handling:
Comply with BS 8110, Section 6.
1.06
A.
Environmental Conditions:
Hot Weather Concreting: Refer to Clause 1.02 STANDARDS. (ACI 305)
1.07
Quality Control:
A.
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-2
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the
purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality to,
or better than those specified, will be considered acceptable. The decision of
acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
(1)
STONECRETE
Local Agent: Roof Technology Gen. Trad. & Cont. Co.
Shuwaikh, Kuwait.
Tel: 4812544-4837472, Fax: 4815789
(2)
(3)
Flex-c-ment Decorative.
Badat Cad. 198/1,
Maltepe - Istanbul, Turkey,
Tel: 0216 457 80 47
Web site: www.dekorbeton.com.
2.02
MATERIALS:
A.
B.
Cement, Aggregates, Water etc. shall meet the requirements of Section 03300:
Pigmented Concrete: Pigments for integrally colored concrete submitted for the
Engineers approval shall be certified in writing by the manufacturer to be in
compliance with ASTM C 979.
Stamp concrete fiber: The Stamped concrete should contain approved quality
Monofilament Fiber (Fiber type II, Polyester co-polymer fiber) at a minimum rate
of one pre-weighed bag per one cubic meter of concrete.
C.
2.03
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-3
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.03.
MIXES
A.
Proportioning of Concrete:
1.
2.
3.
Cement Content:
The cement content of any batch of concrete shall not be less than the specified
minimum value minus 5% of that value, nor more than the specified maximum
value plus 5% of that value. The cement content may be determined from
samples representative of any batch of concrete provided suitable test is used to
measure the cement content of fresh concrete to an accuracy of + 5% of the
actual value with a confidence of 95% and approved by the Engineer. Table 6.1 of
BS 8110: Part 1: 1985 gives the minimum cement required when using a
particular size of aggregate in a Portland cement concrete, to provide acceptable
durability under appropriate conditions of exposure. The reduced minimum
cement contents shall only be used when trial mixes have verified that concrete
with a maximum free water/cement ratio not greater than that given for a particular
conditions of placing and compacting. The Engineer shall determine the degree of
exposure to be adopted for mix design.
4.
The amount of water shall be measured by volume or by weight. The batch weights of
aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for moisture content typical of the aggregates being
used. The accuracy of the measuring equipment shall be within +/- 3% of the quantity of
cement, water, or total aggregate being measured and within +/- 0% of the quantity of any
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-4
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Expansion Joint Filler: Refer to Section 07910, Joint Fillers and Gaskets for
expansion joint filler.
B.
Joint Filler (Cellular): Provide one of the following manufacturers, or equal, 12mm
(1/2 inch) thick unless otherwise required:
a) Retnord, Inc.
b) Hercules
c) Sonneborn Building Products, a Div. of Contech.
C.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
FORMWORK
A.
3.02
MIXING CONCRETE
A.
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-5
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
C.
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
E. Comply with ACI Standard 301, Chapter 8, Para 8.2 for conveying concrete. Concrete
shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by
methods, which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and
maintain the required workability. Concrete shall be placed and compacted without
addition of water. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or
movement of formwork and damage to faces of formwork.
F. Care shall be exercised to prevent segregation of concrete and to prevent splashing
The forms while placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed through canvas tremie
Tubes only equipped with suitable hopper heads. Chutes or trunking shall be of
Variable lengths so that the free fall of the concrete from the end shall not exceed one
meter and a sufficient number shall be used to ensure that the concrete surface is
approximately level at all times. Where alternative provisions can be made, which are
acceptable to the Engineer, then low slump concrete can be dropped vertically through
greater heights than one meter.
After an initial bull floating and the excess bleed water has dissipated, the
Approved colour hardener shall be applied using the dry shake method. Two
shakes are bull floated into the concrete and the final shake is slick finished with a
Fresno or steel trowel until the concrete is uniformly coloured.
B.
As the concrete reaches the plastic stage of set approved quality Powder Release
Agent is applied using the broadcast method.
3.06 IMPRINTING/TEXTURING:
A.
Placement of the first mat is critical to ensuring that the grout lines of linear patterns
are kept square. Placement of the first mat will vary with job layout, stamp pattern,
accessibility, and desired effect. For patterns with a straight running bond grout
line, the stamps can be placed to run parallel or perpendicular to the line of sight of
the observer.
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-7
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
After the first row of stamp mats are laid on to the concrete, the second row of mats
Are placed tightly in front of the first row. This process is repeated until the entire
Slab Has been imprinted. Floppy mats are used to imprint areas that the regular
Mats Cannot reach. Texture skins are used to texture the areas adjacent to walls,
posts, etc. that the floppy mats cannot reach.
C.
Touch up work is done as needed after the stamps are picked up and moved to the
next row. A tamper or dirt pounder may be used to help imprint the design of the
mats as the concrete hardens.
3.07 WASHING/SEALING:
A.
As soon as the concrete has set, usually the next day in most climates, the excess
powder release agent is pressure washed from the surface. Some release agent
will be left in the grout lines and texture grooves of the pattern leaving the two
toned, aged colour effect. After the slab has dried completely, two coats of Sealer
(CHROMESEAL TM 30% Solids Clear Sealer) are applied by roller or sprayer,
finishing the application.
3.08 CURING
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
B.
Comply with BS 8110, Section 6, Para. 6.6 and 6.8 and ACI Standard 301,
Chapter 12.
The methods of curing and their duration shall be such that the concrete will have
satisfactory durability and strength, and the member will suffer a minimum
distortion, be free of excessive efflorescence and will not cause by its shrinkage,
undue cracking in the structure.
Curing shall be promptly commenced, be total in coverage and continued without
interruption.
Curing Methods
1.
3.10
PATCHING
_____________________________________________________________________________
STAMPED CONCRETE
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/03330-8
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 04220
UNIT MASONRY
PART-I, GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Unit
Masonry Walls.
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The Work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies as
further cited herein:
A.
B.
ANSI A41 .2
ASTM A 116 Specification for zinc coated (Galvanized) steel woven wire fence
fabric.
ASTM A 615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
ASTM C 31
ASTM C 39
ASTM C 90
III-2/04220- 1
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
BS 729
BS 877
BS 890
Building Limes.
BS 1200
BS 4482
BS 5075,
BS 6073,
BS 6073,
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Erector Qualifications:
Work is to be carried out by persons skilled in laying unit masonry
B.
C.
2.
Keep all equipment, used for mixing transporting and laying mortar, cool
3.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 2
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturers Literature:
Submit to the Engineer manufacturers printed literature indicating product
specification and installation instructions for each product required by this Section.
B.
Manufacturers Data:
Submit to the Engineer manufacturers certification that the following comply with the
requirements specified:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Portland Cement.
Masonry Cement.
Hydrated Lime.
Mortar Aggregates.
Concrete Masonry Units (all types specified).
Reinforcing Bars. etc.
Samples:
Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and following the submittal of manufacturers literature and data, 3
samples of each unit masonry hereinafter listed. Samples will be reviewed for colour
and/or texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor. Samples to be submitted as follows:
D.
1.
2.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
1.05
PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION
A.
Pre-installation Conference:
Prior to the start of each major type of masonry work, meet at the site and review the
installation procedures and co-ordination with other work. Meetings shall include
Contractor, Engineer and Major Material Manufacturers as well as other whose work
must be coordinated with the masonry work.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 3
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
B.
C.
Pre-installation Inspection:
Examine all parts of the supporting structure and the conditions under which the
masonry work is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of any conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
installation of masonry work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
1.06
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Hot Weather Work: Take all necessary precautions to keep mortar and blocks and
other materials cool and in particular:
1.
Do not mix mortar or lay units while shade temperature is above 40 Deg. C.
on a rising thermometer or above 43 Deg. C. on a falling thermometer.
2.
3.
4.
The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for all steps
necessary for compliance with the above
1.07
A.
Do not change brands or sources of supply for masonry materials during the course
of the work.
B.
Deliver unit masonry materials, other than bulk materials, to site in manufacturers
unopened containers, bundles, pallets or other standard packaging devices, fully
identified with name, type, grade, colour and size.
C.
Protect all unit masonry material during shipment, storage and construction against
wetting and soilage or intermixture with earth or other types of materials.
D.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent all masonry items from chipping, cracking
or other damage during transportation, unloading and storage on site. Damaged units
will not be allowed to be installed.
E.
Do not use metal reinforcing or ties having loose rust or other coatings that will
reduce or destroy bond.
F.
Outside storage of masonry units and reinforcement shall be on plank platforms, off
the ground, in dry locations.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 4
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
1.08
PROTECTION
A.
B.
1.09
CO-ORDINATION
A.
The Work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other
sections. Verify dimensions and Work of other trades which adjoin materials of this
Section before the installation of items herein.
MATERIALS - MORTARS:
A.
Portland Cement for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 150, Type I, or BS 12, ordinary,
non-staining, without air entrainment, natural colour or white as required to produce
the required colour of mortar or grout.
B.
C.
Aggregates: ASTM C 144 or BS 1200 except for joints less than 6 mm use
aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve (1.18 mm).
1.
2.
D.
Water: Clear and free of deleterious materials salts, etc. which would impair the work.
E.
F.
Plasticizers: BS 4887, free from Chlorides and compatible with cement. Do not use
without prior approval of Engineer.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 5
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
Measurement: Use methods which will ensure that proportions are controlled and
accurately maintained. Measure aggregate materials in a damp, loose condition.
B.
Mortar: Comply with the proportion and physical requirements of ASTM C 270 for the
following type:
1.
C.
Type S.
Grout: Comply with the proportion requirements of ASTM C 476 for the following
types, as applicable:
1.
Fine Grout.
2.
Course Grout.
D.
Do not use mortar or grout which has begun to set or if more than 1.1/2 hours have
elapsed after initial mixing.
E.
2.03
A.
Unit Masonry Mortar: ASTM C 270, except limited to the mix materials herein-before
specified and the following cement/lime ratios by volume; wherein sand (in damp
condition) equals 4/21 to 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime:
1.
2.
3.
Type M:
Type S:
Type N:
Not more than 1/4 part lime per part Portland cement.
Not more than 1/2 part lime per part Portland cement.
Not more than 1 part lime per part Portland cement.
2.04
A.
General:
Provide blocks as shown, complying with type classifications, weights, grades and
curing requirements as hereinafter specified and the following general requirements-:
1.
Do not use blocks which have chips ,cracks, voids, streaks, iron spots or other
substances which might stain exposed finished surfaces
2.
Obtain blocks from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform
texture and colour, for each type required, for each continuous area and
visually related areas.
3.
4.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 6
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Cure blocks by low pressure steam curing at a pressure of 0.7 kg/cm Raise
the curing temperature uniformly at not more than 0.560C per minute from
300C to 660C and allow the masonry units to cure for approximately 3 2/1
hours from initial set period. Thereafter keep the units moist for a period of 7
days by means of a fine spray of water and then allow to air dry for 14 days.
Allow an interval of not less than 3 hours between the forming of the units and
the curing process.
2.
C.
Finishes:
Standard finish: Provide concrete block units with exposed faces of the
manufacturers standard colour and texture, unless otherwise shown or specified.
2.05
A.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: Truss type welded wire units of 3 m (10 ft.) lengths
with prefabricated corner and tee units. Fabricate from ASTM A 82 or BS 4482 cold
drawn steel wire with deformed side rods and plain 9 gauge truss rods, crimped if
used in cavity wall construction. Provide width of between 37 and 50mm (1.1/2 and
2) less than wall thickness.
1. Fabricate with 9 gauge (3.7 mm) side rods, unless otherwise shown.
2. Provide units with a single pair of side rods, unless otherwise shown.
3. For use in interior partition walls, fabricate from mill galvanized wire.
4. For use in exterior walls, use stainless steel.
B.
Reinforcing Bars: Steel reinforcing bars for vertical reinforcement complying with
ASTM A 615, intermediate grade, size as shown or specified herein, free from mill
scale and excess or loose rust deposits. Provide two 12 mm diameter bars in each
block.
C.
Concrete Inserts:
1.
Unit Type: Furnish unit-type inserts of the type and size shown, of stainless
steel or malleable iron, or fabricated from not less than 2.6 mm (12 gauge)
steel with 458 g/sq m hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication (ASTM A 153,
Class B-2 or BS 729 Table 1.)
2.
Dovetail Strap Type: Furnish dovetail slots with 22 mm wide flat bar anchors
formed from 1.5 mm (16 gauge) stainless steel, with 6 mm upturned end or 12
mm dia. hole located within 12 mm of end. Anchor to extend to within 37 mm
of face of masonry units.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 7
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Anchoring Devices:
Provide bolts, straps, bars and rods of the type and size shown, but fabricated from
not less than 1.5 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal or 9 mm diameter rod stock unless
otherwise shown.
Fabricate devices from stainless steel.
E.
F.
Vertical Restraints
Block work to be restrained at vertical abutments with concrete with stainless steel
adjustable ties at every course for building in.
2.06
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
B.
Wood Nailers:
For wood nailers and similar items to be set into the masonry work see other relevant
sections of these specifications.
C.
D.
Joint Fillers:
Use approved material to meet the required fire rating and as specified in Section
JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS.
E.
Sealants:
Use approved sealant to meet the required fire rating (if any) and as specified in
Section SEALANT.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 8
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
INSPECTION
A.
Examine Surfaces:
Inspect existing surfaces and ensure that they are satisfactory for work to proceed as
specified. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Engineer and do not proceed until
rectified to satisfaction of Engineer.
3.02
WORKMANSHIP-GENERAL
A.
Manufacturers Recommendations:
Comply with the manufacturers printed instructions and recommendations for the
installation of each type of masonry product, unless otherwise shown or specified.
B.
Thicknesses:
Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except for single wythe
masonry walls which may be built to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using
blocks of nominal thickness shown.
C.
Chases:
Form chases and recesses as may be required for the work of other trades. Do not
chase hollow blocks. Do not cut horizontal or diagonal chases in load bearing work.
Provide not less than 200mm of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
D.
Construction Openings:
Leave openings for equipment as shown or required to be installed at later date.
Complete masonry work after equipment is in place using materials identical with
those immediately adjacent to the opening.
E.
Construction Joints:
Step back unfinished work for joining with new work; toothing will not be permitted.
Before new work is started clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if
specified to be wetted), and remove loose blocks and mortar prior to laying fresh
masonry.
F.
Cutting Blocks:
Use motor driven saw designed to cut blocks with clean sharp corners. Cut blocks as
required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full blocks
without cutting wherever possible. Avoid the use of less than half size blocks at
corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. Do not use chipped or
broken blocks.
G.
Age of Blocks:
Do not build in concrete blocks until at least 28 days after manufacture and until they
are fully cured.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 9
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
H.
Mixing mortar
Mortar for masonry work shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer, mixing by hand will
not be permitted.
3.03
A.
B.
Bond:
Use running bond for all single-wythe masonry walls unless otherwise shown .In
multiple-wythe walls, bond wythes together with header blocks wherever possible,
unless otherwise shown. Where wythes cannot be masonry bonded, use wire ties of
the type and spacing shown, unless horizontal joint reinforcing provides the tie
between wythes. Where type and spacing of wire ties is not shown provide either
continuous or individual type ties, installed so that double wires will be spaced not
more than 600 mm centers both horizontally and vertically.
C.
Lay solid blocks with completely filled bed head and collar joints. Butter ends
with sufficient mortar to fill head joints or perpends and tamp into place. Do
not slush head joints.
2.
Lay up walls plumb and true with courses level and accurately spaced and
co-ordinated with other work. Variations from plumb, true or level of more than
1/800 in any direction are unacceptable, and will be rejected.
3.
4.
Provide anchoring devices of the type shown, or of standard type if none are
shown. Anchor masonry work to all abutting structural members. Space
anchors 600 mm centers at vertical and overhead support locations, and 600
mm centers both ways behind masonry veneer work, unless otherwise shown.
5.
Maintain uniform joint width except for minor variations to maintain bond
alignment. Except for cavity wall construction leave no voids between blocks.
Slush and grout back joints against other work as blocks are pushed into
place.
6.
7.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 10
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
D.
8.
9.
Protect masonry walls with damp sacking to prevent drying out and to allow
for chemical setting of bond.
Control Joints:
Install control joints in masonry walls where shown. Rake out mortar in preparation
application of sealant.
E.
F.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Grouting:
1.
Use fine grout for filling spaces less than 100 mm in both horizontal
directions.
2.
Use coarse grout for filling spaces 100 mm or larger in both horizontal
directions.
3.
4.
Place vertical reinforcing before grouting and either before or after laying
blocks, as required by job conditions. Support vertical reinforcing at intervals
shown. Where individual bars are placed after laying masonry, place wire
loops extending into cells as masonry is laid and loosen before mortar sets.
After insertion of reinforcing bar, pull loops and bar to proper position and tie
free ends.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 11
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
5.
Prior to grouting, clean and inspect grout spaces and close cleanout holes.
Remove dust, dirt, mortar droppings, loose pieces of masonry and other
foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper
position as required. Clean top surface of structural members supporting
masonry to ensure bond. After final cleaning and inspection, close cleanout
holes and brace closures as required to resist grout pressures.
6.
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry units and breaking of
mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting
operations.
7.
Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working day with
not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation. Place pour in lifts
which do not exceed .1.2 m. Allow not less than 30 minutes and not more
than one hour between lifts of a given pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift
during pouring operation.
8.
When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of masonry,
extend reinforcing beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to
within 37 mm of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, lay
masonry units and place reinforcing for second pour section before grouting.
Repeat sequences if more pours are required.
9.
Low-Lift Grouting:
10.
a.
b.
c.
Pour grout using container with spout or chute. Rod or vibrate grout
during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of
grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours within 37 mm of
top course of pour.
High-Lift Grouting:
a.
Provide cleanout holes in first course at all vertical cells which are to
be filled with grout.
b.
Use units with one face shell removed and provide temporary
supports for units above, or use header units with concrete
brick supports, or cut openings in one face shell.
3.04
LINTELS
A.
Provide masonry lintels wherever shown, and wherever openings in the masonry of
more than 300 mm are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Unless otherwise shown provide one reinforcing bar for each 100 mm thickness of
wall, and use bars of adequate size in relation to opening width. Provide minimum
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 12
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
lintel bearing at each jamb of 100 mm for openings which do not exceed 1.8 m width.
Precast lintels, or form lintels in place with adequate temporary support. Cure precast
lintels thoroughly before handling and installing.
1.
B.
Steel Lintels
Steel lintels may be used with the approval of the Engineer. Contractor to provide
sizes as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.05
A.
In addition to requirements herein before specified the following shall apply to the
installation of exterior masonry walls:
1.
2.
Install reglets and nailers for flashings and other related work where shown to
be built into masonry work.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Place wall ties in cavity work as the work proceeds and set with slope to
outer wythe. Do not raise one wythe more than 1350 mm above the other
where wire ties are used or 450 mm above the other where any other type of
tie is used. Close cavities at openings and top.
7.
Provide ties 150 mm long for cavities up to 50 mm wide and 200 mm long for
cavities 56 - 100 mm wide.
8.
_______________________________________________________________
Wythes of thickness
Cavity
Width
(one or both)
mm
Spacing of Ties
Horiz. Vert.
mm
mm
mm
50-75
900
450
1-75
750
450
100-150
45
450
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 13
UNIT MASONRY
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
9.
3.06
Protect masonry walls with damp sacking to prevent drying out and to allow
for chemical setting of bond.
A.
Replace blocks which are chipped, broken stained or do not match adjoining units as
intended, or are otherwise damaged; provide new blocks promptly to match adjoining
blocks, pointing up mortar or grout joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Cleaning:
During the completion of masonry installation and the tooling of joints, enlarge any
voids or holes and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings
and adjoining work to provide a uniform, neat appearance, properly prepared for the
application of sealant compounds and other work to follow.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/04220- 14
UNIT MASONRY
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 05165
SPACE FRAME SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes responsibility of the Space frame Contractor and consists of
furnishing everything necessary for and incidental to the execution and complete
installation of the steel space frame, and accessory work. The complete system,
including space frame, and related accessories shall be purchased from Space
frame Contractor as a single source.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Reference Standards: See Division 1. In addition to requirements shown
Or specified, comply with applicable provisions of following for design, materials,
fabrications and installation of components parts:
1. ASTM A123-84 (Table 1) for hot dip galvanizing cylindrical tubes both interior and
exterior, 55 microns.
2. ASCE 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings & Other Structures.
3. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel
4. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 9th Edition
1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. The extent of the steel space frame and associated work as defined above is shown
on the drawings.
B. The work includes the following:
1. Engineering design of space frame and accessory parts by Space frame Contractor
including structural calculation submittals.
2. Fabrication, packaging and delivery to job site by Space frame Contractor.
3. Erection by the Space frame Contractor or under the direction of a technical advisor
of the Space frame Contractor by a specialist approved installer.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Structural Calculations:
1. Prior to fabrication of space frames, submit design calculations prepared in
accordance with current design rules of the AISC or EN and applicable codes
as called for by the project engineer. Include analysis for all pertinent load
cases live, dead, wind, thermal, seismic, etc.
a. Supply reactions at supports for review by Project Engineer and maximum
frame deflections.
b. Supply calculations for support and other details as necessary. Members shall
be sized by the space frame manufacturer.
c. Existing test reports will not be acceptable in lieu of calculations but can
supplement calculations.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05165- 1
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit complete Shop Drawings including tube layouts and details. Show
dimensioned layout of space frames in relation to adjacent work such as walls,
columns, beams and slabs, etc
a. Include details of all supports and data to show provisions for vertical and
horizontal expansion/contraction and sway of space frames as necessary.
b. Identify all materials and all attachments devices and accessories.
D. Erection Drawings:
1. After approval of Shop Drawings, provide a detailed set of Field Erection Drawings.
2. Identify each part by size and number. Describe method for erecting space frame
including sequence of installation.
E. Samples:
1. Fabricator shall submit one (1) sample full size node with connecting member
having the specified finish.
2. Submit product data showing compliance with galvanizing of components and
other quality and fabrication requirements.
III-2/05165- 2
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
1.11 SEQUENCING
A. Section 01100 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. The Space frame Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a written guarantee
warranting all work of this section to be free of defects in material, workmanship and
corrosion for a period of (10) year from date of completion. Completion shall be
defined as the specific work of this section.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05165- 3
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
PART2 -PRODUCTS
III-2/05165- 4
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
b. Submit a list showing a minimum of twenty (20) completed projects using the
products and systems specified herein.
c. Provide complete details for review by the Contracting Officer demonstrating
compliance with the Contract Documents.
2.04 MANUFACTURER
A. The manufacturer shall provide all structural members, nodes and accessories
Necessary for a complete Space Frame installation. Each member shall be clearly
marked in accordance with all shop and erection drawings for ease of identification
and installation.
The Space Frame system shall be manufactured in accordance with the
requirements of ISO 9002.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS :1. Khalid Ali Al-Kharafi & Bros.
P. O. Box. 2886, Safat 13029,
Kuwait.
2. Rafid Space Frame Factory
P.O. Box. 89700, Riyadh 11692,
Saudi Arabia.
3. Mero Structures Inc.
N112, W18810 Mequoun Road,
P.O. Box. 610, German Town,
Winconsin 53022.
Tel: 262/255-5561 or 800/323-0072
Fax: 262/255-6932
Or Approved Equal
The Contract Documents are based on the round ball and tube system.
B.
System Description: The system shall be formed from steel and consist of
cylindrical Tubes and solid forged spherical nodes. Aluminum is not an
acceptable alternative.
1. Steel Tubes:
a. Tube material shall conform to ASTM A500 Gr. B or equivalent minimum.
b. Assembly to consist of a hollow tube with forged cone welded on each end.
Tube ends to remain open. Substitution of sealed tubes not acceptable.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05165- 5
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Steel Nodes:
a. To consist of hot forged solid steel spheres conforming to A1S1 C1045
material - normalized. They shall be drilled and tapped as necessary. Extra
holes other than those specifically shown in approved drawings not permitted.
b. Joints using gusset plates, two piece assemblies, friction fit or castings shall
not be used.
3. Bolts:
a. Shall conform to ASTM A307, A325 or A490 or equivalent.
C.
D.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Erector must examine the space frame support locations and the areas and
conditions under which the space frame work is to be installed. Notify the Space
frame Contractor of any known conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. However,
ground assembly may proceed.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05165- 6
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
3.03
A.
Erect space frame and accessory items in strict accordance with the
manufacturers approved Shop and Erection Drawings and installation
procedures.
1.
Members shall not be positioned by the use of force.
2.
Members shall be installed such that condensation drain holes are
pointing downwards.
3.
Provide temporary bracing and support as required to ensure stability
during erection process.
4.
Touch up paint work with matching air dry paint as necessary.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
The Installed system shall be:
1. Structurally sound and free from distortion.
3.04
A.
CLEANING
Space frame shall be installed clean and in one visit. General Contractor shall
Provide protection measures for completed space frames and accessories to
prevent damage or deterioration from subsequent work.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05165- 7
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide metal fabrication work in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents.
1.02
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Metal fabrication work is defined as including any items shown on the
Drawings and/or specified herein, fabricated from steel and iron shapes,
plates, bars, pipes, tubes, casting and roll-formed shapes which are not a
part of an overall system specified in any other Section of these
Specifications.
B. Employ only experienced tradesmen for both fabrication and installation, who
are capable of producing work of the highest standards of quality in the
industry.
1.03
STANDARDS
A. The metal fabrication work, except as otherwise shown or specified, shall
comply with the following codes, specifications and standards:
AISI
AISC 5326
AWS D1.1
SSPC
OSHA
ANSI A12.1
ANSI A58.1
AST, A36
ASTM A29
ASTM A48
ASTM A53
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-1
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
ASTM A108
ASTM A123
ASTM A153
ASTM A283
ASTM A307
ASTM A501
ASTM A512
ASTM A545
ASTM A568
ASTM A569
ASTM A575
ASTM A576
ASTM E488
B. Copies of all above codes and standards shall be submitted to the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are specified for the
purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality
to or better than those specified will be considered acceptable. The decision
as to acceptability will rest with the Engineer.
2.02
METAL STANDARDS
A. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ATM A 36 and ASTM A6.
B. Steel Plate for Cold-Forming: ASTM A 283 Grade C and ASTM A6.
C. Hot Rolled Steel Bars (including bar-size shapes): ASTM A575 (Merchant
Quality) of ASTM A 576 (Special Quality) Quality and Grade as selected by
fabricator, and ASTM A29.
D. Cold Finished Steel Bars: ASTM A 108, Grade as selected by fabricator and
ASTM A29.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-2
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
Hot Formed Rectangular Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501, butt welded, coldfinished and stress relieved.
G. Cold Drawn Steel Tubing: ASTM A 512, sunk drawn, butt welded, coldfinished and stress relieved.
H. Gray Iron Catings: ASTM A 48, Class 30B.
I.
J.
Steel Sheet for Cold Forming: ATM A569 and ASTM A568, hot rolled sheet
steel of commercial quality, pickled and oiled, free of defects which would
impair the look.
2.03
2.04
I.
Power Driven Anchors: Type and size as shown or if not shown comply with
manufactures standards. Use only devices and tools which comply with
ATM E488. Do not use as suspension member anchor.
J.
SHOP PRIMERS
A. General: primers selected shall be compatible with finish paints. Refer to
Section 09900, Painting for finish paint material and applications.
B. Ferrous Metal (Fast Drying): For clean smooth surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-3
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
C. Ferrous Metal (Slow Drying): For clean rough surfaces with light rust or mill
scale.
D. Galvanized Metal: Pre-treat galvanized metal surfaces in accordance with
SSPC-PT 2-64. prime coat.
2.05
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. For the manufacture of metal fabrications which wil be exposed to view, use
only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including
pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to
cleaning, teating and application of finishes including zinc coatings.
B. Use materials of the size and thickness shown or if not shown of the required
size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability into he
finished product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions when or
accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.
Use the type of materials shown or specified for the various components of
work.
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight shaper edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately
1mm unless otherwise shown. From bent-metal corners to the smallest raise
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work.
D. Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication wherever work
adjoins other work that proceeds if in construction. Do not delay job
progress; allow for trimming and fitting of metal fabrication work wherever the
taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. On
shop drawings note which dimensions have been verified by field
measurement.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the
recommendations of AWS D1.1. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush, to
match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the
type show or if not shown use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or
bolts.
G. Pre-drill bolt and/or screw holes as shown and as required for attachment of
metal fabrication work and for the attachment of adjacent materials.
H. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built
into masonry for the installation of metal fabrication work coordinate delivery
of such devices with other work so as to avoid any delay. See concrete and
masonry Sections of these specifications for installation of such inserts and
anchoring devices.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-4
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
I.
Provide for anchorage of the type shown, coordinated with the supporting
structure and the construction programme. Fabricate and space anchoring
devices as shown and as required to provide adequate support for the
intended use of the work.
J.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap metal fabrication work as may be required to
receive finish hardware and similar items of work.
K. Use hot rolled steel bar for work fabricated from bar stock, unless work is
shown or specified to be fabricated from cold finished or cold rolled stock.
L.
2.06
FINISHES
A. Steel finish: Hop dip galvanized to comply with ATM A123 for galvanized iron
and steel products made from rolled, pressed and forged steel lupus,
castings, plates, bars and strips.
2.07
2.08
PROTECTION
A. Protect exposed finishes by covering with adhesive paper or other suitable
covering prior to shipment from the fabrication or finishing shop.
B. Protect installed works from all damage until completion of the works.
2.09
CHEQUER PLATE
A. Material shall be as indicated below, unless noted otherwise, or unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer.
1 Galvanized Steel for interior dry well areas.
2. Aluminum Alloy to for exterior exposures
3. Stainless Steel for interior wet well chambers
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-5
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
B. Design
1. Min. uniform live load: 1kN/m2 in machine areas, 5kN/m2 in other areas.
2. Min. concentrated live load: 5kN over any 300x300mm area.
3. Max. deflection: 0.2% of span.
4. Provide intermediate supports as required, to meet deflection and loading
requirements.
C. Fabrication
1. Size of fit operating shown on Drawings.
2. Minimum thickness: 4mm for steel, 6mm for aluminum.
3. Maximum unsupported span: 750mm
4. Chequer or other approved non-slip surface.
5. Provide kicker plate 50mm above plate surface on outer perimeter of
elevated floor (3mm thick for steel, 5mm for aluminum)
6. Use 316 stainless steel hardware.
7. Floor plates shall be neatly and accurately cut to the configuration
necessary, to clear structural members and pipes and to permit removal
of the plates.
a. Reinforce openings to provide required load carrying capacity.
D. Coating (After Fabrication)
1. Carbon steel shall be galvanized.
2. Aluminum shall be anodized.
3. Stainless steel shall be treated and passivity.
E. Unless shown otherwise, frame openings as follows:
1. Angles of minimum size 40mm x 40mm x 6mm having 8mm dia x 150mm
long anchor bolts spaced at maximum of 600mm along each side with not
less than two anchor bolts per side.
2. Drill and tap frame to receive 8mm dia cap screws at not more thank
600mm centres with not less than two screws per side.
2.10
STEEL STAIRCASE
A. Fabricate galvanized steel staircase for the locations shown and as required
for proper installation and use.
2.11
2.12
TUBULAR RAILINGS
A. Comply with ANSI A 12.1, A 58.1 for railings provide galvanized steel
handrails on walls at stairs and similar locations as required by ANSI A 12.1.
B. Provide brackets and anchors for railing posts and for handrail supports as
shown and as approved.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-6
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
C. Custom fabricates pipe railings to the dimensions and details shown, with
smooth bends and welded joints ground smooth and flush.
2.13
CORNER GUARD
A. Provide corner guards, fabricated from galvanized steel angle section of the
size and at locations shown. Fabricate guards with anchors for casting into
concrete or building into masonry, all as shown on the drawing.
2.14
MISCELLANEOUS TRIM
A. Provide shapes and sizes as required for the profiles shown. Except as
otherwise noted, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and steel
bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use
concealed field splices wherever possible provide cutouts, fittings and
anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with
other work.
2.15
2.16
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-7
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A. Set metal fabrication work accurately in locate, alignment and elevation,
plumb, level, true and free of rack measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Anchor as shown or as required for the intended use, using concealed
anchors wherever possible.
C. Where pipe sleeves are used to support miscellaneous iron work, anchor
sleeve to supporting concrete or structure to provide rigid support.
1. Pipe sleeves shall be of galvanized steel of size shown and adequate to
meet the requirements.
D. Fit exposed connections together to form tight hairline joints.Weld
connections, which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop
welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch
up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units,
which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for
bolted or screwed field connections.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05500-8
METAL FABRICATIONS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 05510
METAL LADDERS
1.01
GENERAL
A.
General:
B.
1.
2.
3.
Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm
o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder.
4.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.02
A.
General:
1.
2.
Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not
more than 6 m o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not
more than 1200 mm o.c. between primary hoops.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05510- 1
METAL LADDERS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.
B.
2.
3.
4.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05510- 2
METAL LADDERS
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 05520
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
1.03
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
1.
2.
2.
Handrails:
a.
b.
c.
b.
c.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 1
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.
C.
1.04
a.
b.
c.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat
loss.
1.
D.
Infill of Guards:
A.
B.
C.
1.
2.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work..
1.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
D.
E.
F.
1.
2.
3.
a.
Show method of finishing or connecting members at intersections.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 2
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
G.
Welding certificates.
H..
I.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
2.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
2.
1.07
A.
B.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance
requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 3
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.00
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.01
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304 for interior installations and grade 31 6L for
exterior installations.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304 for interior installations and grade 3 16L for
exterior installations.
C.
D.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 for interior installations and grade 31 6L for
exterior installations.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 4
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.03
A.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A ,Standard Weight (Schedule
40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1.Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C.
D.
Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or
required by structural loads.
2.
2.04
FASTENERS
A.
Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 for interior applications and type 316 for
exterior applications stainless-steel fasteners.
2.
Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class
Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
B.
C.
D.
1.
2.
3.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 5
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.05
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
B.
Hardware For Swing Rail Segments: Stainless steel of matching alloy as railing
pipes or tubes
C.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.
D.
E.
Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer formulated for
priming zinc-coated steel and for compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and
complying with SSPC-Paint 5.
F.
G.
Bituminous Paint:
H.
I.
Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
1.
2.06
FABRICATION
A.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 6
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws ,and
similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate steel railings with welded and fabricate stainless steel railing
with non-welded connections, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2.
3.
4.
I.
J.
K.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if
is manufacturers standard splicing method.
L.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
M.
N.
O.
P.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed
by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 7
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
Q.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with
inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with
steel plate forming bottom closure.
R.
For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from matching-steel- alloy tube or
pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts ;limit movement of post without lateral
load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket
covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
1.
Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by
removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal
as railings.
S.
Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at
edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details
indicated.
T.
2.07
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMMs Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
C.
D.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
2.08
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish
indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
C.
D.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 8
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
2.09
A.
Galvanized Railings:
1.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2.
Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
3.
4.
5.
Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
6.
7.
8.
Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease,
dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic- phosphate process.
9.
10.
1.
2.
Interior Railings (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP/7 NACE No. 4, Brush- off Blast
Cleaning.
3.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 9
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors,
to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for
Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.02
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2.
3.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variation from,
parallel with rake of step, and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm
in 3 m.
C.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
D.
E.
3.03
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 Fabrication
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart
than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve
extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side,
and locate joint within 150 mm of post.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 10
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
3.04
ANCHOR POSTS
A.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve
with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply
with anchoring material manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post
for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill
annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturers written instructions.
C.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing
anchoring material.
D.
Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 3-mm
buildup, sloped away from post.
E.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required
by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting
surfaces.
2.
For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting
surfaces.
F.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.
3.05
A.
Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to railing
ends and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts.
B.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and
welded to railing ends or connected to railing ends using non-welded connections.
3.06
A.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance
from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
1.
B.
Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 11
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________
C.
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields
and hanger or lag bolts.
2.
3.07
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.08
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings
at time of Substantial Completion.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
B.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/05520- 12
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 07110
SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.02
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified materials
have been successfully utilized on work of a similar scope to that shown and
specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have been completed
and in use for minimum five (5) years without any evidence of failure.
B.
Membrane Waterproofing shall be executed by an approved Specialist SubContractor with minimum of 10-year experience.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Guarantee
1.
Provide 10-year manufacturers warranty.
2.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07110-1 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________
3.
1.04
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
B.
Deliver bulk materials with a certification from the manufacturer stating the
name, type, and grade of each product used. Furnish certificate accompanying
each load (or furnish manufacturers blanket certificate) for each bulk product
used in the work.
C.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.06
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping
of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during membrane
waterproofing operations.
C.
D.
Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,
storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with
local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials
specified or required under this Section.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07110-2 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
2.
3.
2.
3.
D.
Water stops: 240mm Four ribbed polyvinyl chloride water stop with nailing
flange.
E.
_____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07110-3 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
A.
3.02
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
3.03
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material, which would impair the work.
Do not proceed with membrane waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit,
vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed.
C.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Flash all pipes, conduits, sleeves and other projections passing through
membrane waterproofing and provide tight construction throughout. Use
prefabricated boots or field-fabricated boots, fitted coverings, and other
accessories as required.
E.
F.
G.
with
the
approved
membrane
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 07120
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART - 1, GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with Fluid Applied Waterproofing.
B. The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:1. Protective painting of concrete in contact with soil.
2. Protective painting for setting floor tiles in wet areas (Toilet & Kitchen)
3. Protective painting on top of Roof concrete slab
1.02
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following agencies
as further cited herein :
BS 3416 Waterproofing Paint
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer shall provide evidence indicating that the specified
materials have been successfully utilised on work of a similar scope to that
shown and specified for this Project. The system examples cited shall have
been completed and in use for a minimum five (5) years without any evidence
of failure.
B. Fluid applied waterproofing shall be executed by an approved specialist SubContractor.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Data: Submit to the Engineer Manufacturers specifications
and installation instructions for the fluid applied waterproofing system and
other data to show compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Contractors Review: Before commencing work submit written statement
signed by the Contractor stating that the Contract Documents for the fluid
applied waterproofing system have been reviewed with a qualified
representative of the waterproofing materials manufacturer and that he is in
agreement that the selected materials for fluid applied waterproofing system
are proper, compatible and adequate for the application shown.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07120-1
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply fluid applied waterproofing during inclement weather or when air
temperature is outside the range recommended by the manufacturer.
1.08
PROTECTION
A. Protect fluid applied waterproofing from damage during construction period so
that it will be without any indication of abuse or damage at time of completion
or covering with other materials.
B. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and
dropping of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during fluid
applied waterproofing operations.
C. Prevent materials from running into and clogging drains.
D. Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during delivery,
storage and installation of flammable materials specified herein. Comply with
local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous materials
specified or required under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. 1.
2.
Waterproofing Paint
Waterproofing cold applied Elastomeric coating.
The rubber bitumen emulsion shall comply with BS 3416 Type I Class A or B and
shall be water bound emulsion with a minimum 60% total solids content by
volume, comprising bitumen with fine particles of rubber. Not less than 10% nor
more than 20% of the total solids shall be rubber. The consistency shall be such
that it can be applied to the surface by brush at normal temperature comply with
CP 231 for application of paint.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07120-2
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
2.02
MANUFACTURERS
A. The product and manufacturer specified hereinafter are specified for the
purpose of establishing minimum quality standards. Products equal in quality
to, or better than, those specified may be acceptable subject to the Engineers
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
A. Examine all surfaces to which the fluid applied waterproofing is to be applied.
Do not proceed with the application until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and approved by the Engineer.
3.02
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A. Prior to the installation of fluid applied waterproofing, meet at the Project Site
to review the material selections, installation procedures and co-ordination of
the work with other trades. Meeting shall include the Contractor, the Engineer,
the Sub-Contractor, Manufacturers Representatives and any other
Contractors/Sub-contractors whose work requires co-ordination with this work.
3.03
PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of debris and deleterious material which would impair the
work.
B. Do not proceed with fluid applied waterproofing until all drains, piping, conduit,
vents, ducts and other projections through the substrate have been installed.
3.04
INSTALLATION
A. Install fluid applied waterproofing in accordance with manufacturers printed
instructions except as hereinafter specified.
B. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
C. The second coat consisting of undiluted emulsion (Fluid waterproofing)
shall be applied as soon as the priming coat is dry, at the approximate
rate of 10 litres per 15 square metres.
D. Extra thickness of waterproofing material to be applied at corners,
intersections and angles.
E. The emulsion shall be applied by brush, squeegee or spraying strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. It shall not be applied during,
or when rain or dust storms are to be expected.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07120-3
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
F. For underground structures back fillings shall not be commenced until the
second coat of emulsion is quite dry.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07120-4
FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING
( )
_______________________________________________ _______________________________________
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Rigid polystyrene
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
B.
ASTM CS 18-76
ASTM C 558-92
ASTM C 578-92
ASTMC653-83
ASTM C 665-91
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07210- 1
BUILDING INSULATION
( )
_______________________________________________ _______________________________________
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
The insulation shall be vermin proof and contain sufficient fire inhibitors
to achieve a class 1 resistance to surface spread of flame when tested.
C.
D.
B.
Installer Qualification: A firm which has specialized for not less than 5
continuous years in applicable type of work. The Contractor shall
submit evidence of compliance with the above requirements to the
Engineers Representative for approval.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07210- 2
BUILDING INSULATION
( )
_______________________________________________ _______________________________________
C.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under
which the insulation is to be installed, and notify the Engineers
Representative in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable
to the installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07210- 3
BUILDING INSULATION
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 07430
COMPOSITE ALUMINUM BUILDING PANEL
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
B.
This Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the specifications
affecting work of this trade
C.
Furnish all labors, materials, plants, Equipments and appliances and perform
all necessary operations required to execute the work of this section
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
C.
1.02
A.
References: The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall
be relevant BSI standards including but not limited to the following except as
otherwise specified herein. Perform work in accordance with the specification
codes and standards cited therein and addenda and supplements.
B.
Components : Design and size to withstand dead and live loads caused by
positive and negative wind presser for normal to plane of panel. Design
components for a wind pressure of 46 m/s.
C.
D.
E.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 1 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
F.
G.
Air Seal: Provide continuity of air barrier seal at building in conjunction with air
seal materials specified.
H.
1.03
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
1.04
+ 3 mm
+ 3 mm
+ 3 mm maximum each plane
+ 6 mm maximum
nil
0.3 mm
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings : Indicate dimensions, panel profile and layouts, spans, joints,
construction details, methods of anchorage and sequence of installation
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 2 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
MOCK UP
A.
B.
C.
D.
Submit Warranty ; For Defective work, degradation of panel finish, color fading
and for water tightness for a period of 15 years
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 3 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2
0B
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIAL
Aluminium Composite panels cladding system consists of aluminum
composite panels made of double Aluminium sheets filled in between with a
polythene core. The system consist of standard size panels, custom made
panels, shaped, according to specific requirements, specifically extruded
Aluminium sections for edges, joints and corners, beside other accessories,
e.g. supporting sections, anchors etc to provide a complete work in
accordance with the requirements of contract. Panel surfaces are finished as
per the drawings.
2.02
A.
B.
2.03
MANUFACTURER
ALUCO BOND
Alu singen GmbH
D-78221 sinGen
Tel; 07731-80-2060
Agents in Kuwait : Alghanim international General Trading
Tel: 2424775
2B
Approved equal
SPECIFICATION
A.
B.
C.
Size and shapes: size and shapes of panels are in accordance with drawing
and the existing dimension of the building.
D.
E.
Cladding Sheets : Aluminium sheet 0.5 mm thick on each having the following
properties
Alloy PERALUMAN Tensile strength
0.2% proof stress
Modules of elasticity
Elongation
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 4 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Bending Strength : the bending strength of core material is neglected and the
maximum bending tension occurs at the outermost skin and depending on the
applied moment and the panel thickness
Bending stress should not exceed the limits indicated in clause 5 above
G.
2.04
A.
B.
The finish shall be Metallic three coat system, factory applied on properly
pretreated metal and thermo cured at 240 degree C.
C.
2.
3.
D.
The total dry thickness of the system must be minimum 40 microns and the
system applied according to specifications supplied by M/S Penwalt
Corporation or equal and approved.
E.
F.
G.
The Kynar 500 material must be sourced from the licensee, giving such
approval.
1.
PPG
(DURANAR)
2.
WHITTAKER
(FLUROCERAM)
3.
DESOTO
(FLUROPON)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 5 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
H.
AAMA 605.1
2.
ASTM D 523
Gloss grades
3.
ASTM 2244
Color uniformity
4.
ASTM D 1400
Film thickness
5.
ASTM D 3363
Pencil hardness
6.
ASTM D 2794
7.
ASTM D 968
Abrasion resistance
8.
ASTM D 117
9.
ASTM D 714
Humidity resistance
10.
ASTM D 1308
11.
ASTM D 2244
Color conservation
12.
ASTM D 659
J.
K.
L.
Fire Behavior : When tested according to BS 476 the following result a were
obtained :
1.
2.
3.
M.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 6 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
1B
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fix Panel : To the channel with help of steel pins and spring washers
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
3.03
CLEANING
A.
B.
Clean and Wash Pre-finished Surfaces: With mild soap and water rinse with
clean water.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07430- 7 COMPOSITE ALUMINIUM BUILDING PANEL
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
SECTION 07500
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with Composite Roofing System.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to,
the following: Waterproofing paint, Heat Insulation, Lightweight Concrete, Membrane
roofing and flashing, Precast pavers, Sand-cement setting bed and
polythene sheet, Sealant etc.
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies as
further cited herein:
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street,
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19103 USA as published in Compilation of ASTM
Standards in Building Codes.
UL: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Publications Stock, 333 Pfingsten Road,
Northbrook, Illinois 60062 USA.
General Specifications for Building and Engineering Works of the Ministry of
Public Works of the Government of Kuwait, latest edition.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-1
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
C.
D.
E.
1.04
MOCK-UP
A.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Roofing and flashing shall be executed by a specialist roofing SubContractor licensed, franchised or approved by the roofing materials
manufacturer, using experienced skilled roofers, having a minimum of
five (5) years experience in the installation of materials specified herein
on projects comparable to this Project. Furnish a written affidavit stating
that the roofing applicator is licensed.
C.
All roofing and flashing work shall be applied in strict accordance with
the roofing manufacturers written requirements and specifications
applicable to roof conditions.
D.
E.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-2
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
F.
Do not proceed with roofing work during inclement weather. Comply with
manufacturers recommendations for application and curing under
specific climatic conditions.
1.06
PRE-INSTALLATION CO-ORDINATION
A.
Pre-Roofing Conference:
1.
After approval of all materials and prior to installation, a preroofing conference shall be held at the job site.
In attendance shall be (1) Engineer (2) Contractors, (3) Roofing
Sub-contractors and (4) Manufacturers representatives.
2.
1.07
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
1.08
A.
B.
C.
1.09
PROTECTION
A.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-3
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
B.
Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and
dropping of materials. Repair and restore other work damaged during
roofing membrane operations.
C.
D.
Take all necessary precautions against fire and other hazards during
delivery, storage and installation of flammable materials specified
herein. Comply with
local ordinances and fire regulations in the installation of hazardous
materials specified or required under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ROOFING MATERIALS
A.
B.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-4
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
surfaces that
waterproofing.
are
not
suitable
for
correct
application
of
the
B.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
Mortar Screed: The mortar screed shall be laid in proper thickness and
carefully trowelled to an even surface, maintaining the falls. The cement,
fine aggregates and water for the mix shall be as per section 09205, lath
and plaster.
E.
Waterproofing
Membrane:
The
waterproofing
membrane
shall
comprise of two layers of 4 mm thick modified asphalt membrane as
approved by the Engineer and shall be applied as per manufacturers
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-5
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
that
the
Roof Tiles: Precast Terrazzo tile shall be provided and laid as described
in section 09420. Tiled skirting shall consist of a triangular fillet backing
of concrete or sand cement mortar with a row of cement tile skirting or
20mm thick terrazzo tiles (size as required) bedded on in sand cement
mortar to form a skirting to match the horizontal tiling. The top of the tile
skirting shall be let
into the wall/parapet and the joint carefully pointed and sealed with an
approved quality sealant. Skirting may be laid recessed and vertically
against parapet if shown in the drawings or agreed by the Engineer.
G.
3.04
FLOOD TESTING
A.
B.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-6
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________ ___
own hoses. Mark any leaks and repair when the membrane is dry.
Before flood testing, ascertain from the Structural Engineer that the
structure will withstand the dead load of the water.
C.
Any area where leaks occur shall be drained, thoroughly dried, repaired
and then re-tested.
D.
E.
3.05
A.
Make good, all damage to the building resulting from this work or
operations. Particular care shall be taken to avoid staining any part of
the exposed structural or finished work. Hoisting of materials shall be
done with extreme care. Use approved means to protect exposed
surfaces.
B.
At completion of work under this Section, remove from the site and
legally dispose of packaging, containers and other accumulated
materials, and leave the work in a clean and satisfactory condition.
______________________________________________________________________________
PROTECTED MEMBRANE ROOFING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07500-7
( )
____________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 07910
JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide joint filler and gasket work, in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.02
STANDARDS
A. Comply with manufacturers instruction for the installation of each type of
joint filler or gasket, unless otherwise shown or specified.
1.03
SUBMITTAL
A. Manufacturers Literature: Submit to the Engineer copies of the following
information from the manufacturer.
1.
2.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07910-1 JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS
( )
____________________________________________________________________________________
PART - II PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A. Manufactures: The products and manufacturers specified hereinafter are
specified for the purpose of establishing minimum quality standards.
products equal in quality to, or better than those specified, may be
acceptable subject to the Engineers approval.
B. Size and Shape: provide joint fillers and gaskets as shown or if not shown,
consult the manufacture and determine the proper size and shape
considering joint movement and conditions at time of installation.
C. Hardness and Compressibility: Provide joint fillers and gaskets as
specified, and as recommended by the manufacturer for proper
performance in each specific conditions of use.
D. Compatibility: Provide only the type of joint filler which is compatible with
the joint surfaces, and each sealant or caulking compound, as stated in
the data published by the manufacturers of the joint filler and the sealant
or caulking compound, or as certified by the joint filler manufacture for
each application.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive: Apply to joint fillers and gaskets, wherever
applicable and at Contractors option, to facilitate installation.
F. Color: For exposed gaskets or joint fillers, provide the color shown or if the
color is not shown, it will be selected by the Engineer from the
manufacturers standard collars.
For concealed joints, provide the
manufacturers standard color, which has the best overall performance
characteristics.
2.02
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07910-2 JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS
( )
____________________________________________________________________________________
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Examination: Examine the joint surfaces and the conditions under which
the work is to be done. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A. Apply in continuous runs without voids or interruptions, except as may be
otherwise shown. Trim for tight fit around obstructions or elements
penetrating the joint.
B. Do not puncture the surface or self-skin on moulded or extruded types of
cellular joint fillers.
C. Depress face edge of joint fillers accurately, wherever used as backup for
sealant, as shown or as specified by sealant manufacturer for proper
application of sealant.
D. Recess expose edges of joint fillers and the remainder of the construction
period so that they will be without indication of deterioration or damage at
the time of completion of the works.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/07910-3 JOINT FILLERS AND GASKETS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08110
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances, and materials and performing all operations in
connection with Hollow metal doors and frames, Steel door etc..
1.02
1.03
A.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
Provide hollow metal doors and frames for fire rated openings manufactured
by a firm whose units are inspected and tested for fire rated doors and the
certificates are approved by Kuwait Fire Brigade.
1.05
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies
as further cited herein: 1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel1.05
2. SDI-100 (Steel Door Institute USA) Standard Steel doors and Frames.
3. ANSI A151.1 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for physical
Endurance for steel doors and hardware reinforcing.
4. ASTM A569 Steel, Carbon, Hot-rolled sheet and strip, commercial
quality.
5. ANSI/ASTM A366 Steel sheet, Carbon, Cold-rolled, commercial
quality.
6. ANSI/ASTM E283 Rate of Air leakage through exterior windows and
doors.
7. BS 1245 Metal Door and Frame(Steel)
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-1
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.07
A.
Protect hollow metal units from damage during transit, storage and
installation. Tool marks, rust, blemishes and only other damage on exposed
surfaces will not be acceptable. Store material in a dry location, off the ground
and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Sheet Steel: ASTM A366 and A568, free from scale, pitting or
other defects; finish, stretcher leveled for doors.
B.
C.
Supports and Anchoring Devices: Structural steel, ASTM A 36; or sheet steel,
ASTM A366 cold-rolled or ASTM A569 hot-rolled and ASTM A568; as shown
but not less than 16 gauge (1.5mm) fabricating; comply with ASTM A153,
Class B.
D.
E.
2.
Expansion Bolts: FS FF-S-325, Group III, expansion shield (selfdrilling tubular expansion sheet bolt anchors), Type 1 or II recess, type
2c flat head.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-2
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.
F.
Sheet Steel Primers: One of the following compatible with finish and intended
service refer to Section 09900, Painting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
H.
Provide manufacturers standard hinges, pull and locking handles and all other
hardware required for the operation indicated. Finish of all hardware items to
be approved by the Engineer.
I.
2.02
MANUFACTURER
A.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
B.
Make hollow metal works strong, rigid, neat in appearance, and free from
defects. Reinforce corners of doors as required to prevent twisting or sagging.
C.
Form exposed surfaces free from warp wave and buckle, with all corners
square, unless otherwise shown. Form moulded members straight and true,
with joints coped or mitre, well formed, and in true alignment. Dress welded
joints on exposed surfaces smooth so they are invisible after finishing.
D.
Provide undercuts and clearances for doors as required and for rated doors
and panels within the limitations established by the authority having
jurisdiction. Prepare doors and frames to receive weather seals and acoustic
seals shown or specified.
E.
Provide a full mitre continuously welded on back side at frame corners and
stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed
surfaces.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-3
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Accurately machine, file and fit exposed connections with hairline joints
unless otherwise shown.
G.
H.
2.04
A.
Comply with the Specifications herein for flush doors and to the requirements
of Clause 1.03.
2.05
FLUSH DOORS:
A.
Construct interior doors with 18 gauge (1.2mm) outer sheets and exterior
doors with 16 gauge (1.5mm) galvanized outer sheets, with edges welded,
and finished flush. Do not expose seams or joints on door faces or edges.
Reinforce the outer face sheets with 20 gauge (0.85mm) interlocking vertical
C-shaped or Z-shaped reinforcing members spaced not over 150 mm apart
and spot welded to outer face sheets. Provide flush inverted 16 gauge
(1.5mm) steel channels welded to outer sheets at top and bottom of door.
Place filler between reinforcing members.
1.
B.
Provide flush closure at the top of exterior doors. Weld inverted steel
channels to both outer sheets to form integrally with edge construction of
door.
C.
Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive mortise type
hardware in accordance with the contract hardware schedule and templates.
Provide reinforcing, drill, and tap for doors to receive surface applied
hardware, except at push plates and kick plates provide reinforcing only. Use
steel secured by spot welding as reinforcement. Hardware reinforcement shall
be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-4
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
5.
6.
manufacturers
2.06
A.
2.07
ACOUSTICAL DOORS
A.
2.08
A.
Provide combination type fully welded hollow metal doors frames to be used
as both door buck and trim, formed to profiles indicated and, unless otherwise
shown, of the following minimum gauges:
B.
1.
Interior Doors
2.
3.
Anchor frame jambs to concrete or masonry which has been placed prior to
setting of frames with 10mm countersunk flat head bolts into expansion type
shields or inserts, minimum of 4 per jamb.
1.
C.
D.
Terminate bottom of frames at the indicated finished floor level. Where floor
fill or setting beds occur support frame by 4 gauge (1.9mm) metal strap
welded to frame and adjustable anchor strip anchored to the structural
substrate. Floor anchor strips shall be 14 gauge (1.9mm), punched for two (2)
6mm fasteners.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-5
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
E.
Reinforce head of frames over 900mm wide with 12 gauge (2.6mm) steel
channel unless a structural lintel is provided to support the wall construction
above the frame or unless there is not wall construction above the frame.
F.
Mortice, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortice type hardware. Provide
internal reinforcement for surface mounted hardware which is to be field drill
and tapped. Locate hardware in frames to match location shown or specified
for doors and in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates.
Provide the following:
1.
2.
Strike reinforcements:
manufacturer.
3.
4.
Full enclosing steel cover boxes over all mortises: Provide removable
access plates in the heads of frames to receive concealed door
closers. Off-set reinforcement so that faces of hinges or keepers are
flush with face of the frame rebate.
5.
Holes for Rubber Door Silencers: 3 for single doors and 4 for pairs of
doors. Install plastic plugs in silencer holes to keep holes clean during
installation.
5mm
by
size
required
by
hardware
2.09
A.
Comply with the Specifications herein for hollow metal door frames, and form
to the profiles required to receive weather seals and acoustic seals. Drill and
tap frame as required.
B.
Install seals in single lengths for each side with uniform exposure of 10mm,
using adhesive and other attachments as per the seal manufacturer
recommendations and instructions.
2.10
A.
Comply with the Specifications herein for hollow metal door frames and to the
requirements of Clause 1.03.
2.11
SHOP PAINTING
A.
Clean, treat, and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal work, inside and
out, whether exposed, or concealed in the construction.
B.
Thoroughly clean all metal surfaces of loose scale, shavings, fillings, dirt and
other deleterious materials by use of wire brushes or other effective means.
Remove grease and oil by one of the methods specified in SSPC-SP-1-63
Solvent Cleaning. Fill as required to seal seams in edges.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-6
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
C.
Apply 2 coats of metal primer to all reinforcement and attachment steel and
framing, which will be contact with masonry or concrete.
D.
E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes, except over membrane
waterproofed areas. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with anchor bolts or
with power driven fasteners. Coordinate the installation of built-in anchors for
wall and partition construction as required with other work.
C.
D.
E.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-7
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
A.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08110-8
METAL DOOR & FRAME
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08210
WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
PART- 1 : GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with wood doors and frames.
1.02
QUALITY CRITERIA
A.
B.
All doors shall be the product of the same manufacturer to insure uniformity of
quality and appearance throughout the project.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
Submit Schedules and elevations indicating door sizes, construction, swing,
label, undercut and applicable hardware locations. Dimension and detail
openings for glass lights, louvers and grills.
B.
Samples:
If doors are to be factory finished, manufacturer will submit veneer samples of
specified veneer with their standard finish colors at Engineers request or a
colour sample from the Engineer will be sent to the manufacture for duplication.
C.
Product Information:
Submit manufacturers product installation instructions, finishing instructions
and any general recommendations manufacturer may have for the use and
care of each door type.
1.04
COORDINATION
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 1 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
A.
Doors shall not be delivered to the building until weatherproof storage space is
available. Store doors in a space having controlled temperature and humidity
range between 30 and 60 percent. Stack doors flat and off the floor, supported
to prevent warpage and protected from damage and direct exposure to
sunlight.
B.
C.
Do not walk or place other material on top of stacked doors. Do not drag doors
across one another.
D.
The Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors from damage
prior to, during and after installation
1.06
WARRANTIES
A.
Provide a written warranty from the door manufacturer that provides for the
replacing as originally furnished from the factory, any door exhibiting defects in
materials, or workmanship, including the following :
1.
2.
3.
4.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
All door frames shall be of solid hardwood (Teak or Oak) rebated and grooved
60-70 mm thick as approved and shall be fixed over sub-frame (concealed).
Width of the door frame shall be up to the full width of the wall unless otherwise
mentioned. Architrave shall be of solid hardwood and of size and decoration as
per Engineers approval.
B.
All door panels shall be 45-50mm thick unless otherwise shown and shall be
any of the following types as per drawings and approval of the Engineer.
1.
2.
3.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 2 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
C.
General:
1.
2.
Surfaces & Patterns: Provide lumber surfaced 4 sides (S4S) and worked
to profiles shown.
3.
D.
Particle Board Core: Single thickness slab of 3 ply particle board complying
with ANSI A208.1, Grade 1-L-1, average density not les than between 448-512
Kg/M3, hot pressed with synthetic resin glue. Linear expansion shall not
exceed 0.03% in either direction when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037,
Sections 76 through 79. Faces of core slab shall be of 0.254mm thick flakes,
with resin content a minimum of 50% higher than core resin content. Face layer
density shall be minimum of 25% higher than core density.
E.
Lumber Core: AWI Section 100 with the following requirements: Low densities
thoroughly kiln dried wood blocks not more than 76.2mm wide random lengths.
F.
G.
Top and bottom edge bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from
defects, which will be visible when finished as specified herein.
H.
I.
Side Edge bands: Thoroughly kiln dried hardwood, free from defects, which
will be visible when finished as specified herein.
1. Wood for side edge bands shall be matching face veneers for natural finish
doors.
J.
Cross bands: Minimum 1.6mm thick after sanding, properly dried hardwood.
K.
L.
Face veneers for opaque finish: Any hardwood veneer that, when finished,
will not show any grain, imperfection or other surface defects when used with
the opaque finish specified.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 3 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
M.
Face veneer for Interior painted finish: Standard thickness sound grade
hardwood veneer conforming to CS35, overlaid with medium density cellulose
fiber sheets impregnated with phenolic resin.
N.
O.
2.03
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Fasteners:
B.
C.
1.
2.
3.
Anchors: Type, Size, material and finish as required for the condition
for use.
Adhesives:
1.
2.
Joint Fillers: Back up rods for sealant as specified in Section JOINT FILLERS
AND GASKETS.
D.
2.04
MANUFACTURER
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 4 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.05
A.
Cores
1.
Particleboard Core - shall conform to Type I density (28-30 pounds per
cubic foot), Class 1, commercial standard # 236-66.
2.06
A.
2.07
A.
Door faces, edges and cutouts shall have one (1) coat shop applied lacquer as
specified at the place of manufacture. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before
applying lacquer.
B.
Apply lacquer uniformly without runs, sags or bare spots to a dry film thickness
of 1 mil (0.025 mm).
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01
A.
INSPECTION
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction and the conditions under which
the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Do not install doors until concrete, masonry, plaster, tile and other wet work is
completed and dried in the areas to receive doors.
B.
C.
D.
E.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 5 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
A.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08210- 6 WOOD, DOORS AND FRAMES
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08520
ALUMINIUM DOORS, WINDOWS
PART-I: GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with
aluminium doors windows and screens.
1.02
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
in
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all components for review by the
Engineer. Include full size sections of all typical members, dimensioned elevations,
anchors and other accessories required. Show glass thickness and glazing details.
C.
Samples:
1.
Submit to the Engineer sets of samples for each type, finish and colour
required. Submit sample of the specified alloy on 300 mm lengths of
extrusion; show the maximum range or variation in colour and shade.
Sample Submittal and approval shall be for colour, texture, and specular
gloss only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
2.
1.04
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
Except as otherwise indicated, comply with all applicable requirements including air
infiltration tests, water resistance tests, and applicable load tests specified in
ANSI/AAMA 302.9 classification PA-3 HP6O.
B.
Design, fabricate and install aluminium doors, windows and screens so that the
total, installed, glazed unit will withstand the gravity loads and wind pressure as
shown on drawing.
C.
Make provisions at sill to drain water and condensation to exterior face of the
frames.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 1
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Provide tight joints and effectively seal windows against water leakage and air
infiltration. Water leakage is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water, other
than condensation, on any inboard part of window, either during testing or under
actual weather conditions.
E.
1.05
GUARANTEE
A.
Submit a guarantee for a period of 5 years that the powder coating will not develop
excessive fading or excessive non-uniformity of colour or shade.
1.06
A.
Before dispatch from the Manufacturers Works all exposed surfaces shall be
protected with a suitable low tack tape, or other means of protection recommended
by the manufacturer. The adhesion, resistance to atmospheric conditions and
elasticity of the tape shall be suited to the purpose intended.
B.
C.
Deliver all components to project site completely identified. Store in accordance with
manufacturers instructions, above grade on dunnage, properly protected from the
weather, construction activities and other possibility of damage or loss.
PART-2, PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Manufacturers: The materials specified hereinafter are specified for the purpose of
establishing better quality standards. Material equal in quality to, or better than those
specified, may be acceptable subject to the Engineers approval.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Aluminium Sheets and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to fulfill
performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and
fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as
required.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 2
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
C.
Stainless Steel Sheet and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to fulfill
performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming and
fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for finishing as
required.
D.
Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories Required to Join or
Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM A36 and ASTM A283,
galvanized or, if galvanizing is not compatible with alloy or component parts, shop
painted with zinc chromate primer after cutting to size.
E.
Aluminium Angles, Plates, Bars and Other Aluminium Members required to Join or
Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: Alloys recommended by
manufacturer or fabricator to develop required strength of assembly.
F.
Fasteners: Stainless steel type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action with
the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use oval-head
countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match adjacent surfaces.
G.
H.
I.
Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.03
A.
Generally:
Construct aluminium door, window to the sizes and dimensions shown on the
Drawings and as specified. Doors and openable parts of the window and screen
units (ventilators) shall be complete with all necessary hardware.
B.
Unit Construction:
1.
b.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 3
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
c.
d.
Ventilators:
a.
Miter cut all corners, weld throughout entire section profile and dress
welds smooth on all exposed and contact surfaces.
b.
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
Complete the welding, cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Weld with
electrodes and by methods recommended by the metal manufacturer in accordance
with applicable recommendations of the AWS. Use only methods which will avoid
distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind weld areas smooth before
proceeding with other treatment.
B.
C.
Fit and assemble all work in the shop insofar as practicable. Mark and disassemble
units which are too large for shipment to project site, retaining units in sizes as large
as possible for shipment and erection.
D.
Carefully fit and match all work with continuity of line and design, using rigidly
secured joints with hairline contact, mitred corners, unless otherwise shown.
E.
Reinforce members and joints with steel or aluminium plates, bars, rods or angles
for rigidity and strength as needed to fulfill performance requirements. Use
concealed fasteners for jointing which cannot be welded.
F.
Separate unlike metals or alloys with a heavy coating of bituminous paint or other
suitable permanent separation as required to prevent galvanic action.
2.05
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour range samples
for use in comparing against production material. Mark and code extremes of the
colour range so that these will not be installed adjacent to one another in any one
unit.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 4
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
INSPECTION
A.
Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which the
work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Co-ordinate aluminium doors, windows and screens, with the work of other trades
and provide items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the
location of such items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the
final location of doors, windows and screens.
C.
Erect the doors, windows and screens, in accordance with the manufacturers
written instructions and recommendations. Employ only experienced erectors.
D.
Erection Tolerances: Erect aluminium doors, windows and screens within the
following tolerances:
1.
2.
3 mm maximum.
3 mm maximum.
E.
Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the
manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do not cut
through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect material and
remove all evidence of cuffing and trimming. Remove and replace members where
cutting and trimming have impaired strength or appearance.
F.
G.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal shims
and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports anchored to
supporting structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes, wedges, spacers,
shims and other items during erection which will not stain or mark the finish of units.
H.
I.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 5
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
J.
Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in
accordance with component part manufacturers recommendations. Grind smooth
and restore finish.
K.
Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts which will be concealed, with zinc
chromate paint.
L.
M.
Adjust ventilators and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weather
stripping. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
3.03
A.
In addition to specific protection and cleaning methods required for each component
part by the respective Sections of these Specifications and recommended by the
respective manufacturers, maintain the work throughout the construction period in a
clean and properly protected condition so that it with not be damaged at the time of
completion of the Works.
B.
Carefully remove protective material and clean down aluminium doors, windows and
screens.
Cleaning and protective methods shall be carefully selected, applied and maintained
so that finishes will not become uneven or otherwise impaired as a result of unequal
exposure to weathering conditions.
C.
3.04
A.
Water Penetration Test: After completion of the installation and normal curing of
sealant and glazing compounds, test for water leaks in accordance with
Specifications
for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for Water Leakage
AAMA Standard FC-1-76. Conduct tests in the presence of the Engineer. Repair
or replace any component that leaks and retest as directed.
________________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08520- 6
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Quality Assurance
1.
1.02
DETAIL REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
Templates:
Make finish hardware to templates, with wood and/or
machine screws as applicable to door and frame details. Provide
templates and schedules to door and frame manufacturers and other
trades requiring same, so that doors and frames can be cut,
reinforced, and prepared in the shop to receive hardware.
D.
E.
Single Source: Use only the products of one manufacturer for each
type of hardware specified.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-1
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-2
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
D.
1.05
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
1.06
Package and label each item of hardware separately. Tag each item
in accordance with the final hardware schedule. Each package shall
contain appropriate fastenings, instructions, and installation templates.
Protect all items from loss or damage in shipment.
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-3
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.
2.02
HARDWARE FINISHES
A.
2.03
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-4
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.04
FASTENERS
A.
2.05
Provide concealed fastening wherever possible. The use of selftapping or sheet metal screws is prohibited except for the applicable of
flush mounted push and kick plates.
1.
2.
BUTT HINGES
A.
B.
C.
Hinge Size
114 x 114 mm (4.5 x 4.5)
125 x 125 mm (5 x5)
No. of Hinges
1.50 m or less
1.51 m to 2.25 m
2.26 m to 3.00 m
D.
E.
2
3
4
2.
3.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-5
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
F.
4.
Tips: Button.
5.
2.07
General: Provide mortise type lock sets and latch sets as scheduled.
All lock sets, latch sets or deadlocks to be provided complete with
trim, armor fronts and 5 pin cylinders, concealed fastenings, washers
and bushings. Provide wrought box strikes for each lock set, latch set
or deadlock with curved lips of sufficient length to protect frame. All
locks shall have special type self-locking square spindles with ball
bearing guides, square front, and strike.
1.
2.
B.
C.
2.
3.
4.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-6
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Lever handles
a.
FSB: Equivalent
b.
Glutz: Equivalent
c.
Orgo: 8100
2.
Roses
a.
b.
c.
3.
Escutcheon
a.
b.
c.
4.
2.08
FSB: Equivalent
Glutz: Equivalent
Orgo: F0 6550
Cylinder accessories
a.
b.
c.
E.
FSB: Equivalent
Glutz: Equivalent
Orgo: 6550
Toilet signs
1.
2.
CYLINDERS
A.
B.
Single cylinder
a.
ASSA/Ruko: 156
b.
Sargent:
40
c.
DOM: 33N
d.
KFV: 701
2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-7
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.
2.09
PANIC DEVICES
A.
2.10
ASSA/Ruko: 156
Sargent:
40
DOM: Construction key
KFV: Equivalent
General: Rim type for single door. UL-listed for fire exits. Cylinder
outside or no outside operation. For double doors, one rim type and
one rim vertical type UL-listed for fire exits. Provide panic devices
where scheduled, subject to the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.
B.
C.
DORMA: TS 83RA
Sargent: 1250
LCN: 1460
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-8
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
DORMA: TS 73A
Sargent: 1250 PA
LCN: 4010
DORMA: TS 83H0
Sargent: 1250 H
LCN: 4010
2.11
A.
B.
GEZE: TS 500 - HO
DORMA: BTS 84
YALE USA: Equivalent
LCN (Canada): Equivalent
2.12
FLUSH BOLTS
A.
General: All flush bolts are to be provided in pairs (top and bottom of door).
Provide the top bolt in a length sufficient to locate the flush bolt operator no
more than 1.8 m above the finished floor. Provide standard strikes for top
bolts. Provide Dust-Proof Strikes for bottom bolts. Flush bolts for steel doors
to comply with ANSI A115.4. Flush bolts to wood doors to have min 10-mm
rods with a throw of min. 15-mm.
B.
2.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-9
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.13
KICK PLATE
A.
2.14
2.15
A.
2.16
A.
DORMA: 390
Glyn Johnson: Equivalent
2.17
PUSH PLATES
A.
Trimco: Equivalent
FSB: Series 5325
OGRO: TZ2084
2.18
PULL HANDLES
A.
D-Line 4212
FSB: 667038 and 667034
Ogro TG 9025
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-10
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.19
A.
Door Stop
a.
b.
c.
FSB: 3881
Balwin: Equivalent
D-Line: 5070
2.
3.
Coat Hook
a.
b.
c.
FSB: 3645
Trimco: Equivalent
Quality: Equivalent
2.20
WEATHERSTRIPPING
A.
Zero: 555
Reese: 39
Pemko: Equivalent
2.21
THRESHOLDS
A.
2.22
A.
B.
A Great grand master key system has to cover all door types such as wood,
hollow metal and glass doors. The system has to be designed by the
manufacturer in accordance with the Employer and Engineers requirement.
C.
D.
E.
F.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-11
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
G.
H.
I.
J.
Provide steel key cabinet with cabinet lock having a capacity of 150 hooks.
Provide a complete colour cap key control system of the type specified.
Provide complete accessories including key gathering envelopes, labels,
reserve-pattern colour caps with self locking key clips, key receipt forms and
holders, card index and temporary and permanent key markers.
1.
ASSA/Ruko: 9801/150
Lund Equipment: Equivalent
DOM: KC150
K.
On handing over, each key shall be fitted to a coloured nylon key tag with
clear labeling of cylinder/key marking. On handing over, all individual keys
shall be placed on the hooks inside the key cabinet except the master keys,
which are to be handed over in a sealed envelope by the manufacturer.
2.23
MANUFACTURERS NAMES
Dorma GmbH + Co. KG
Dorma drive
Reamstownn, Pa, 17567
U.S.A.
Nevigeser Strasse 22
P.O. Box. 100347
D-42503 Velbert
Germany
Postfach 1440
D-43029 Brakel
Germany
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-12
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
Hoppe AG
D-Line International AS
Pemko MFG.
Cobden Works
Leopold Street
Birmingham B12 OUJ
England
36 Sherborne Street
Birmingham
B16 8DB
England.
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-13
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION GENERAL
A.
Receive hardware for doors as shown and scheduled, and as specified in the
applicable hardware portions of these specifications. Store in a locked space
to prevent loss.
B.
C.
3.02
A.
The hardware supplier shall assist the Contractor in adjusting and checking
the installation of finish hardware. Check, test and adjust moving parts to
ensure free and smooth operation. Provide to the Employer the special tools
required to adjust and maintain hardware.
1.
2.
3.
Clean and polish all exposed hardware at the time of handing over to
the Employer.
END OF SECTION
___________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08710-14
FINISH HARDWARE
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART I-GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with glazing.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:
Interior and exterior glazing of windows, doors and screens.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED:
The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Clear float glass.
2. Clear tempered float glass.
3. Laminated glass.
4. Frosted glass.
5. Wire glass.
6. Clear Low-E glass.
7. Insulating glass.
8. Mirrors.
9. Dry gasket glazing.
10. Silicone glazing
11. Mechanical button glazing.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies
as further cited herein:
A.
B.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 1
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
2.
Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed all glass
thicknesses as shown on the Drawings and the application of heat
absorbing glass for the effects of partial or full shading under the
expected service temperature ranges and that the resulting thermal
stresses will not reduce the Glass Statistical Factor below 2.5.
3.
B.
C.
2.
1.05
SAMPLE INSTALLATION
A.
1.06
A.
B.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 2
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
FABRICATION
A.
Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass
to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut all
glass.
Take field measurements of each opening, before glazing, to verify adequate
bite on the glass and minimum edge clearance. Openings which do not fall
within the tolerances for which precut glass has been sized shall be glazed only
with glass specially cut to fit such openings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
A.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at the project site with the glass manufacturers
representative, sealant manufacturers representative, glazier and fabricator of
framing or other supporting structure to receive glass. Review the glazing
procedure applying glazing materials and installing removable stops. Evaluate
suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated weather
conditions. Review co-ordination with other work.
B.
Before beginning work, inspect sash, frames and rebates to receive glass to
determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash
and frames are ready to receive glazing materials.
C.
Sash, frames and members shall be adjusted, plumbed, and squared. All
rivets, screws, bolts, nail heads, welds and other projections shall be finished
flush in glazing rebates. All corners and intersections shall be sealed and
watertight.
D.
Operable sash shall be fastened and kept stationary until glazing compounds,
except non-setting types, have cured or set.
E.
Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and
other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed before glazing work is
begun.
F.
Any members that are not acceptable to receive glass shall be reported to the
General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work by this installer
shall constitute acceptance of surfaces to receive his work and all defects
occurring thereafter shall be corrected by this installer without additional cost to
the Employer.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 3
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
The installation of each light of glass shall be watertight and airtight, and
capable of withstanding temperature changes, wind loading (exterior glass) and
impact from operation (doors and operable sash), without failure of any kind
including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal, exudation of sealant and
excessive deterioration of glazing materials.
B.
Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any
pieces which have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or any other
evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass before installation.
C.
Do not begin glazing until all cleaning and repairing of concrete and masonry
surfaces has been completed.
D.
E.
Do not begin glass installation until rebates and glazing stops have been
primed and are thoroughly dry. Do no glazing when ambient temperatures are
less than 4C.
F.
All glass shall be clean cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversize
dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be shop cut to fit openings
allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be perfectly
square. Any out of square shall be reported and corrected before glass is
sized. Protect edges of glass from abrasion with ground or adjacent surfaces.
G.
Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on the Drawings
are approximate only and the actual sizes required shall be determined by
measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required
clearance and bite around full perimeter of glass as set forth in the FGMA
Manual.
H.
I.
Glass shall be set without springing and with proper clearances at all edges.
Edge clearance and tolerance shall be in accordance with recommendations of
FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition.
All edges of exposed glass shall be ground and polished to profiles indicated,
except as hereinbefore specified for glass mullions and entrance glass doors.
3.04
A.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 4
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.05
A.
B.
Comply with glass manufacturers printed instructions for the use of setting
blocks, liquid or tape sealants and weep holes in the glazing recess of lock strip
gaskets.
3.06
A.
After completion of exterior glazing and nominal curing of sealants and glazing
compounds, test for water leaks. Conduct tests in the presence of the engineer
in accordance with Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for
Water Leakage, AAMA Standard FC-1-76, except perform tests on not less
than 5% of all exterior lights.
3.07
PROTECTION
A.
All glass shall be protected from damage until acceptance of the work and if
glass is broken remove and replace with specified type. The Contractor shall
be responsible for protection of glass and the replacement of all such damaged
materials after glazing work is completed.
B.
C.
The Contractor may, at his own option, carry glass breakage insurance, but
failure to carry proper insurance shall in no way relieve him of his responsibility
in this regard.
D.
All glazed openings shall be identified with markers such as tapes or flags that
are not in contact with the glass, but which are held in position away from the
glass.
E.
All glass shall be examined on a monthly basis during the guarantee period to
detect any formation of staining and/or etching. If staining or etching is
noticeable, notify Engineer immediately for determination of proper remedial
procedures. Plaster, mortar, paint spatter, or any other coating shall be
removed immediately after contact and shall not be permitted to collect or
remain on glass surfaces.
3.08
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove all labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, and spots from glass
and metal on completion of glazing.
B.
Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each days work.
Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work
progresses.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 5
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
C.
At the completion of the work under this Section, all glass surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and washed. At the completion of the entire project, all
glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed.
END OF SECTION 08800
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 6
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION - 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
PART I-GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with glazing.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:
Interior and exterior glazing of windows, doors and screens.
1.02
WORK INCLUDED:
The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Clear float glass.
2. Clear tempered float glass.
3. Laminated glass.
4. Frosted glass.
5. Wire glass.
6. Clear Low-E glass.
7. Insulating glass.
8. Mirrors.
9. Dry gasket glazing.
10. Silicone glazing
11. Mechanical button glazing.
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of the following agencies
as further cited herein:
A.
B.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 1
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
2.
Statement from the glass manufacturer that he has reviewed all glass
thicknesses as shown on the Drawings and the application of heat
absorbing glass for the effects of partial or full shading under the
expected service temperature ranges and that the resulting thermal
stresses will not reduce the Glass Statistical Factor below 2.5.
3.
B.
C.
2.
1.05
SAMPLE INSTALLATION
A.
1.06
A.
B.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 2
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
FABRICATION
A.
Cutting: Obtain sizes from shop drawings or by field measurement. Cut glass
to fit each opening with minimum edge clearances and bite on glass as
recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not nip glass edges. Factory cut all
glass.
Take field measurements of each opening, before glazing, to verify adequate
bite on the glass and minimum edge clearance. Openings which do not fall
within the tolerances for which precut glass has been sized shall be glazed only
with glass specially cut to fit such openings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITIONS OF SURFACES
A.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Pre-Installation Meeting: Meet at the project site with the glass manufacturers
representative, sealant manufacturers representative, glazier and fabricator of
framing or other supporting structure to receive glass. Review the glazing
procedure applying glazing materials and installing removable stops. Evaluate
suitability of specified compounds and sealants for anticipated weather
conditions. Review co-ordination with other work.
B.
Before beginning work, inspect sash, frames and rebates to receive glass to
determine that other trades have completed preparatory work and that sash
and frames are ready to receive glazing materials.
C.
Sash, frames and members shall be adjusted, plumbed, and squared. All
rivets, screws, bolts, nail heads, welds and other projections shall be finished
flush in glazing rebates. All corners and intersections shall be sealed and
watertight.
D.
Operable sash shall be fastened and kept stationary until glazing compounds,
except non-setting types, have cured or set.
E.
Surfaces to receive glazing materials shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, oil and
other foreign materials, and shall be painted or sealed before glazing work is
begun.
F.
Any members that are not acceptable to receive glass shall be reported to the
General Contractor for correction. Commencement of work by this installer
shall constitute acceptance of surfaces to receive his work and all defects
occurring thereafter shall be corrected by this installer without additional cost to
the Employer.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 3
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
The installation of each light of glass shall be watertight and airtight, and
capable of withstanding temperature changes, wind loading (exterior glass) and
impact from operation (doors and operable sash), without failure of any kind
including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal, exudation of sealant and
excessive deterioration of glazing materials.
B.
Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any
pieces which have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or any other
evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass before installation.
C.
Do not begin glazing until all cleaning and repairing of concrete and masonry
surfaces has been completed.
D.
E.
Do not begin glass installation until rebates and glazing stops have been
primed and are thoroughly dry. Do no glazing when ambient temperatures are
less than 4C.
F.
All glass shall be clean cut. Nipping to remove flares or to reduce oversize
dimensions will not be permitted. Glass shall be shop cut to fit openings
allowing required clearance. Openings to receive glass shall be perfectly
square. Any out of square shall be reported and corrected before glass is
sized. Protect edges of glass from abrasion with ground or adjacent surfaces.
G.
Cut glass accurately to fit openings. Sizes of glass indicated on the Drawings
are approximate only and the actual sizes required shall be determined by
measuring the frames to receive the glass. Size glass to permit required
clearance and bite around full perimeter of glass as set forth in the FGMA
Manual.
H.
I.
Glass shall be set without springing and with proper clearances at all edges.
Edge clearance and tolerance shall be in accordance with recommendations of
FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition.
All edges of exposed glass shall be ground and polished to profiles indicated,
except as hereinbefore specified for glass mullions and entrance glass doors.
3.04
A.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 4
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.05
A.
B.
Comply with glass manufacturers printed instructions for the use of setting
blocks, liquid or tape sealants and weep holes in the glazing recess of lock strip
gaskets.
3.06
A.
After completion of exterior glazing and nominal curing of sealants and glazing
compounds, test for water leaks. Conduct tests in the presence of the engineer
in accordance with Specifications for Field Check of Metal Curtain Walls for
Water Leakage, AAMA Standard FC-1-76, except perform tests on not less
than 5% of all exterior lights.
3.07
PROTECTION
A.
All glass shall be protected from damage until acceptance of the work and if
glass is broken remove and replace with specified type. The Contractor shall
be responsible for protection of glass and the replacement of all such damaged
materials after glazing work is completed.
B.
C.
The Contractor may, at his own option, carry glass breakage insurance, but
failure to carry proper insurance shall in no way relieve him of his responsibility
in this regard.
D.
All glazed openings shall be identified with markers such as tapes or flags that
are not in contact with the glass, but which are held in position away from the
glass.
E.
All glass shall be examined on a monthly basis during the guarantee period to
detect any formation of staining and/or etching. If staining or etching is
noticeable, notify Engineer immediately for determination of proper remedial
procedures. Plaster, mortar, paint spatter, or any other coating shall be
removed immediately after contact and shall not be permitted to collect or
remain on glass surfaces.
3.08
CLEAN UP
A.
Remove all labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, and spots from glass
and metal on completion of glazing.
B.
Remove all rubbish and debris from the site at the end of each days work.
Clean compound smears and stains from adjacent surfaces as the work
progresses.
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 5
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
C.
At the completion of the work under this Section, all glass surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned and washed. At the completion of the entire project, all
glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed.
END OF SECTION 08800
___________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08800- 6
GLASS AND GLAZING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08910
GLAZED ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL
PART 1
GENERAL
A.
B.
The contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the Specifications
affecting work of this trade.
C.
Furnish all labours, materials, plant, equipment and appliances, and perform all
necessary operations required to execute the work of this section.
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
Integral louvers.
C.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02
ERENCES
The minimum standards for products specified in this section shall be relevant BSI
standards including but not limited to the following. Except as otherwise specified
herein, perform work in accordance with specification codes and standards cited
therein and to latest applicable addenda and supplements.
1.
BS 729
: Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles
2.
BS 1470
: Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes. Plates, Sheet and strip
3.
BS 1474
: Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys for General
Engineering Purposes. Bars, Extruded Round Tube and
Sections
4.
BS 1615
: Anodic Oxidation on Aluminium and its Alloys
5.
BS 4255
: Preformed Rubber Gaskets for Weather Exclusion from
Building
6.
BS 4360
: Specification for Weldable Structural steels
7.
BS 4873
8.
9.
BS 4368
BS 5516
10.
11.
12.
13.
BS 5889
BS 6262
BS 6375
BS CP 3
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 1
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.03
SIGN RESPONSIBILITIES
Not withstanding any acceptance of the design or details by the Engineer, assume
responsibility for the design of the curtain walling system including:
A.
All elements of the construction required to satisfy the other requirements of this
specification.
B.
Any necessary sub assemblies and fixings required to safely transmit all dead and
imposed loads to the building structure.
C.
Any weathering system required where the curtain walling abuts any other facing
element of the building or at the head or sill of the walling.
D.
All opening elements, doors, windows louvers, grilles or other apertures which are
wholly contained within the curtain walling system.
1.04
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
System Design : Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads.
B.
1.05
1.
Design for wind load in accordance with BS 6399: Part 2 using the directional
method
2.
3.
A.
B.
1.06
SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
Design, fabricate and install to accommodate the following, without damage to
system or components, or deterioration of seals:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 2
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
F.
Inter-storey drift.
G.
1.07
EXPANSION/CONTRACTION;
Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by a
cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components.
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
SAFETY TEST:
Test with impactor comprising a spherical canvas bag 400mm in diameter, filled with
dry sand, or 3mm diameter glass spheres to give an approximate mass of 50 Kg.
Carry out the test with the specimen panel, mounted vertically and the impactor
attached to a 3m long pendulum, so arranged to deliver the force required.
1.12
FETY OF PERSONS:
When tested on both internal and external faces, the curtain walling must resist a soft
body impact equivalent to 500Nm without.
A.
B.
The piercing of any infill panels, nor the dislodging infill panels, gaskets capping or
any other part of the system which may fall and cause injury to people of outside the
building
1.13
FIXINGS
A.
B.
C.
Are corrosion resistant for the life of the curtain walling system
Will not be corroded nor promote corrosion when used in conjunction with the other
component parts of the system unless adequate measures to isolate them from such
components are also undertaken
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 3
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.14
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.15
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Installer; specialist in this work with minimum five years documented experience
approved the manufacturer.
Complete Mock-Up; to be constructed for a single unit, including intermediate
mullion, vision glass light and infill panel. Assemble to illustrate component assembly
including glazing materials, weep drainage system, attachments, anchors and
perimeter sealant. Accepted mock up can remain as part of the scope of work.
1.16
A.
Delivery
1.
2.
3.
4.
Secure units with proper spacers to ensure that metal surfaces do not come
into contact with one another.
5.
Clearly mark units to indicate their location in the building, marking must not
appear on finished surfaces.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 4
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
C.
Storage:
1.
Store Units Ina Protected Area Away From Construction Activities And
Weather.
2.
Handling
1.
2.
1.17
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Sealant: Should not be installed when ambient temperature is outside the range
deemed acceptable by the manufacturer.
B.
1.18
WARRANTY
Written warranty signed by manufacturer or sub contractor to be submitted that the
works involving glazed Aluminium curtain wall are of good quality free form defects
and in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents and further
promising to repair or replace defective work during a 5 year period following
completion of that portion of the work.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 5
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Approved manufactures or products are specified for the purpose of establishing
minimum quality standards. This list is binding and the contractor is to strictly adhere
to one of the listed manufacturer or products and can no way wave this section,
unless instructed otherwise.
A.
Al Abbar Aluminium
P.O. Box 1626, Dubai, U.A.E
Tel : 971 4 3331362
Fax: 971 4 3331283
Local, alloy designation Contact : Nables Glass & General Trading
Tel : 2433434 , 2447442
B.
C.
AL UMACO
TEL: 2449541/2
2.02
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Glazing sealant and fillers : Comply with requirements in Division 08800 Section
Glazing
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 6
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
G.
Concealed Flashing : Dead soft 26-gauge stainless steel concealed flashing of type
selected for compatibility by the manufacturer.
H.
I.
J.
2.03
FABRICATION
A.
B.
Fabricate System Components : with minimum clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter
seal
C.
D.
E.
F.
Reinforce Interior Horizontal Head Rail : to receive louver blind track brackets and
attachments
G.
H.
Pressure Equalizing and weep holes: To be provided per glazing unit located with
two holes occurring outside setting blocks at each end and one at center of unit.
2.04
A.
Continuous and Homogenous air/Vapour Barrier: To be provided for this work for
installation on the interior side of the thermal insulation, and provide for connection of
air/vapour seal at junction with adjacent air/vapour barrier work provided under other
sections
B.
Barrier Design: To accommodate movement resulting from thermal change and from
structural deflection, and to accommodate positive and negative wind pressures.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 7
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.05
FINISHES
A.
B.
C.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Openings And Adjoining Air Barrier And Vapour Retarder Materials: to be verified
whether ready to receive work
C.
D.
Deviations From Approved Drawings ; inform the Engineer any proposal to deviate
from the approved drawings and submit revision until the Engineers approval is
received.
E.
2.
3.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Assembly to be Aligned, Plumbs And Level: free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly
dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work.
C.
D.
Flashings : To be installed
E.
F.
Attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier and vapour retarder material : to be
coordinated.
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 8
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
G.
H.
I.
Gasket Glazing: Ensure gaskets are installed under slight compression. Do not
Stretch the gaskets when fixing glass.
J.
K.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
C.
Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction : Maximum
20 mm, minimum 5 mm
3.04
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.05
PROTECTION
A.
Protection: Protect the curtain walling system from damage until completion. Do not
allow Aluminium components to come into contacts with cement or gypsum based
products or harmful chemicals.
B.
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/08910- 9
Glazed Aluminium Curtain Wall
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 08920
4 SIDED STRUCTURALLY GLAZED
ALUMINIUM CURTAIN WALL
1.
GENERAL
1.1
1.2
Section Includes
1.1.1
1.1.2
General Requirements.
The system for this project is 4 sided Structural Glazing from
Specified manufacturers & System designer and as supplied
by their local certified partner, fabricator & installer. A letter of
confirmation to submitted.
1.1.3
1.1.4
Proposal Submission
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.3.1
Show typical head, sill jamb and corner details and typical
intermediate mullions.
1.2.3.2
1.2.3.3
1.2.3.4
1.2.3.5
1.2.3.6
III-2/08920-1
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.2.3.7
1.2.3.8
Provisions for
movements.
1.2.3.9
1.2.3.10
1.2.3.11
1.2.3.12
absorption
of
the
building
structure
1.2.3.13
Methods of installation.
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.3
1.4.1.1
1.4.1
1.4.2
III-2/08920-2
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.3
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
1.4.13
1.4.14
1.4.15
III-2/08920-3
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.4.16
1.4.17
1.4.18
1.4.19
1.4.20
1.4.21
1.4.22
1.4.23
1.4.24
1.4.25
1.4.26
III-2/08920-4
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
Performance Requirements
1.5.1
Application
The performance requirements of this sub-contract shall apply to
all connections, seals and joints between the installed glazing
system and adjacent work provided under other trades and
covered by separate sections within the overall specification.
1.5.2
III-2/08920-5
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.4
1.5.6
1.5.6.3
III-2/08920-6
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.7
Glazing
1.5.7.1
1.5.7.2
1.5.7.3
1.5.8
1.5.7.5
1.5.7.6
1.5.7.7
1.5.7.8
Acoustics
The profile sections are to be designed to prevent the resonance
from exterior sound sources to the inner profile.
1.5.8.1
1.5.8.2
III-2/08920-7
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.9
1.5.10 Structural
1.5.10.1 Base design pressures, positive and negative, as created by
wind on a minimum velocity of 45 m/sec (162km/hr). Allow for
impact, suction, up-lift and gusting of wind and take into account
the building height and the proximity of adjacent buildings, which
could cause an increase to the forces due to vortexing and the
venturi affect. All in accordance with the recommendations given
in BSCP3 Chapter V Pt. 2.
1.5.10.2
1.5.10.3
All components must sustain the forces acting upon them and be
capable of transmitting them to the load bearing part of the
building structure in accordance with DIN 18056.
1.5.10.4
e)
III-2/08920-8
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
1.5.11
1.5.12
1.5.13
1.5.14
III-2/08920-9
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.5.15
1.6
Tolerances
1.6.1
1.6.1.3
1.6.1.4
1.6.1.5
Deviation from true straight line of plane, over full length of each
building face; maximum 6 mm.
1.6.2
1.7
Quality Assurance
1.7.1
Engineering
1.7.1.1
1.7.1.2
1.7.1.3
1.7.2
Fabricator's Qualifications
1.7.2.1
1.7.2.2
III-2/08920-10
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.7.2.3
1.7.2.4
SUPPLIERS :
1. Al-Khalid Aluminium
P.O. Box 3777
Safat 13038
State of Kuwait
Tel: (+965) 888 111
Fax: (+965)484-5726
Aluminium@alkhalidgroup.com
2. Al-Ahlia Aluminium
P.O BOX 42392
SHEWAIKK 70654
KUWAIT
TEL: (+965)4747741
(+965)808050
MAILAM@MAILAMIND.COM
3. Kuwait Aluminium
kalu@qualitynet.net
III-2/08920-11
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.7.3
1.7.3.2
1.7.3.3
1.7.3.4
1.7.3.5
1.7.3.6
1.7.3.6.1
1.7.3.6.2
1.7.3.6.3
1.7.3.6.4
1.7.3.6.5
1.7.3.7
1.8
Submittals
1.8.1
Product Data
1.8.1.1
1.8.1.2
III-2/08920-12
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.8.1.3
1.8.1.4
1.8.2
Calculations
1.8.2.1
1.8.2.1.1
1.8.2.1.2
1.8.2.1.3
1.8.2.1.4
1.8.2.1.5
1.8.2.1.6
1.8.2.2
1.8.3
Shop Drawings
1.8.3.1
1.8.3.2
Each shop drawing shall bear seal and signature of the Professional
Engineer.
1.8.3.3
Show:
1.8.3.3.1
Elevations.
1.8.3.3.2
1.8.3.3.3
III-2/08920-13
signature
of
the
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.8.3.3.4
1.8.3.3.5
1.8.4
Samples
1.8.4.1
1.8.4.2
1.8.4.2.1
1.8.4.2.2
1.8.4.2.3
1.8.4.2.4
1.8.4.2.5
1.8.4.2.6
1.8.4.3
1.8.5
1.8.6
Certifications
1.8.6.1
1.8.6.1.1
1.8.6.2
Submit
stating:
statements
certified
by
the
Professional
Engineer
certified
by
III-2/08920-14
the
sealant
manufacturers
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.8.6.2.1
1.8.6.2.2
1.8.6.2.3
1.8.6.2.4
Sealants are compatible with other materials with which they come in
contact.
1.8.6.2.5
1.8.6.2.6
1.8.7
1.9.0
Protection
1.9.1
1.9.2
Do not apply transom or Mullion cover caps and spandrels until the
building is closed in, until the roofing is installed & until no possibility of
alkaline substances can be washed from the building and building
structure onto the work.
1.9.3
1.9.4
1.10
Warranties
1.10.1
III-2/08920-15
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.10.2
Five year warranty shall include but not necessarily be limited to:
1.10.2.1
1.10.2.2
1.10.2.3
Glass or snap-on mullion covers will not break or "pop" from frames
due to design wind loads, expansion or contraction movements, or
structural loading.
1.10.2.4
1.10.2.5
1.10.2.6
Completed installation shall remain free from rattles, wind whistles, and
noise due to thermal and structural movements and wind pressure.
1.10.3
Warrant seals on insulated glass units for ten years. Units shall be
free from condensation, fogging, and obstruction of vision due to film
on internal surfaces.
1.10.4
Warrant the painted coatings will be free from peeling, cracking, pitting,
corroding, or non-uniformity of colour, or gloss deterioration beyond
manufacturer's descriptive standards.
1.10.5
Warrant for five years, the metallic oxide coating on light and heat
reflecting glass. Coating shall be free of oxidation, delamination,
colour change, streaks, disintegration and:
1.10.5.1
1.10.5.2
III-2/08920-16
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
Aluminium
Steel: to BS 5950.
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
2.1.2.5
2.1.2.6
2.1.2.7
2.1.2.8
2.1.3
Fire-stopping
2.1.3.1
2.1.3.2
III-2/08920-17
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4
Sealants
2.1.4.1
2.1.4.2
For concealed non-moving static joints and fixing device penetrations: One
component butyl rubber.
2.1.4.3
For moving working joints and exposed locations including edge spacer
seals to the double glazed units: One component silicone, U.V. resistant,
non-discolouring, formulated not to attract airborne dirt and pollutants,
manufactured by Dow Corning Ltd. or other approved supplier.
2.1.4.4
Sealants, cleaning solvents, fills and primers: Compatible with each other.
2.1.4.5
2.1.4.6
2.1.4.7
2.1.4.8
2.1.4.9
2.1.4.9.1
2.1.4.9.2
III-2/08920-18
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.9.3
Sealant shall not be applied when substrates are wet or when the
temperature is below 40 deg. F. Units shall not be moved until structural
silicone seal has achieved full cure. The time parameters of when units
may be moved is to be established and confirmed with silicone
manufacturer in writing.
2.1.4.9.4
2.1.4.9.4
a)
b)
c)
Stress statement for sealant profile (per shop details), that when
exposed to the specified windload, the design stress on the
silicone sealant does not exceed the permissible stresses
specified by the manufacturer.
III-2/08920-19
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.4.9.5
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
2.1.5.2
2.1.5.3
2.1.5.4
2.1.5.5
Where the glazing units are to be installed with a Two edge mechanical
retention incorporate concealed mechanical retention clips to the other
two edges.
2.1.5.6
Labels: Identify glass panes and insulating glass units with labels,
showing thickness, glass type and manufacturers name. Labels on
insulating glass units shall also show orientation and location of outer
light.
2.1.5.7
2.1.5.8
2.1.5.9
III-2/08920-20
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.1.5.10
2.1.5.11
2.1.5.12
2.1.6
be
from
approved
specified
system
Insofar as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop with the
various parts or assemblies ready for erection at the building site.
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
Accurately machine, fit and securely frame together all joints, corners,
mitres.
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
Weld aluminium with inert metal arc equipment. Make exposed welds
continuous and flush with adjacent surface. Do not mark surface finishes
with welds in back of exposed aluminium. Do not deform the exposed
metal and finish in any way by welding. Where any Structural Aluminium
components are to be welded an allowance is to be made, in the
structural calculations, for the reduction of strength in the components due
to welding.
III-2/08920-21
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
Where frame members are lapped, the faces exposed to the weather
shall be in full, tight contact. Allow minimal clearance for snap-on
components.
2.2.14
2.2.15
2.2.16
2.3
Fabrication Fire-stops
2.3.1
Supply and install fire stopping material at all suspended slabs, between
edges of slabs and exterior cladding. Place fire stop material under
permanent 25% compression. Use impaling clips or metal trims to hold
insulation in place.
2.3.2
III-2/08920-22
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.4
Finishes
2.4.1
2.4.2
Steel at building
galvanized.
2.4.3
2.4.4
exterior
or
in
exterior
assemblies
shall
be
2.4.6
2.4.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
Preparation
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
Installation - General
3.2.1
Erect all work plumb and true and in proper alignment and relationship
to established lines and grades and to specified tolerances.
III-2/08920-23
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Ensure air tight seal at air barrier penetrations for mechanical and
electrical services.
Installation - Sealant
3.3.1
Make surfaces to be sealed, sound, dry, free from dirt, water, frost, loose
scale, corrosion, asphalt, paints or other contaminants which may
adversely affect the performance of the sealing materials.
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
III-2/08920-24
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.3.7
3.3.8
Use sufficient pressure to fill all voids and joints. Sealants shall
bond to all sides of joint except where backup material is used,
sealant shall bond to both sides of joint and shall not adhere to the
backup materials.
3.3.9
Sealant installations shall be a full bead free from air pockets and
embedded impurities and having smooth surfaces, free from ridges,
wrinkles, sags, and imbedded impurities.
3.3.10
After joints have been completely filled, tool them neatly to a slight
concave profile.
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.4
Adjustments
3.4.1
Upon completion of the project and prior to the handing over of the
building to the Owner or at a time as directed, inspect and make good
installation.
3.4.2
Adjust all operating devices, windows and doors to proper and trouble
free operating condition.
3.4.3
3.5
Cleaning
END OF SECTION
III-2/08920-25
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09205
LATH AND PLASTER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Portland
cement plasterwork.
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The work shall conform to the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies as
further cited herein:
1. American Society for Testing Materials :
ASTM C 144
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 206
ASTM C 631
ASTM C 897
ASTM C 926 42.2
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 1
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Sample Panel:
1.
Furnish sample panels of each finish not less than 600 mm square,
on movable frames for preliminary review.
2.
3.
For final review of each finish complete one wall or ceiling area on job site
before proceeding with the work.
C.
1.05
CO-ORDINATION
A.
The work of this Section shall be co-coordinated with that of associated trades. In
no case shall work-requiring inspection be concealed by plaster until the
Engineer has approved it.
B.
Make all changes and adjustment of the materials of this Section necessary to
accommodate the prescribed work of other Section, including cutting and
patching.
1.06
A.
B.
Store plaster, cement and lime off ground, under watertight cover, away from
sweating walls and other damp surfaces, until ready for use. Remove damaged
or deteriorated materials from site at first reasonable opportunity.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 2
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Temperature and Ventilation: Generally comply with ASTM C-926 and BS 5492
as appropriate.
B.
1.08
PROTECTION
A.
Protect all fixtures, frames, inserts and other contiguous work from rusting,
soiling or clogging due to plastering.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Aggregates :
B.
1.
2.
Portland Cement Plaster Finish : ASTM C-897 and one of the following as
directed:
a.
Graded Silica sand passing a 30 mesh screen in colour required to
match Engineers sample.
b.
Gem Silica sand passing a 30 mesh screen in colour required to
match Engineers sample.
Bonded Plaster:
Bonding Agent : Provide a bonding agent composed of a resinous
emulsion about the consistency of paint, formulated for use in bonding
plaster work to walls, columns etc. in accordance with ASTM C-631.
C.
Portland Cement :
For all uses ASTM C-150 Type I or Type II or BS-12.
D.
Miscellaneous Accessories :
1.
Corner Beads: Not less than 26 gauge (0.45 mm) galvanized steel, formed
with a bead not exceeding 5 mm, with expanded flanges at least 63 mm
wide.
2.
Casing and Stop Beads: Not less than 24 gauge (0.60 mm) galvanized
steel, formed with expanded wing unless otherwise shown.
3.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 3
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
4.
Control Joints - Two piece Type: Pair of galvanized steel casing beads
with back flanges formed to provide slip joint action, adjustable for joint
widths 3 mm to 15 mm.
5.
Control Joints One Piece Type: Folded pair of galvanized nonperforated screed in M shape configuration, with expanded flanges.
6.
Strip Lath: Expanded copper bearing steel not less than 1.36 kg/sq.m.
E.
F.
Metal Lath :
Shall be galvanized (in accordance with BS 2989 Class IC) steel lathing
(in accordance with BS 4058) weighing a minimum of 1.25 kg/m2
complete with a protective coating of black asphalt paint.
Lathing shall be mechanically fixed to masonry or concrete to the
complete approval of the Engineer.
2.02
MIXES
A.
General :
1.
Proportions: All mixes are by volume unless otherwise specified. All mix
proportions are suggestive only; variations to meet local conditions and
achieve the desired finish are permitted within the limits specified in
ASTM C-926 or BS 5492/5262 as appropriate.
2.
B.
Lime Putty: Make from hydrated lime; machine mix with water to putty
form; allow standing at least 15 minutes before using.
2.
3.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 4
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine substrates and the conditions under which the work is to be installed, and
do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work have been corrected.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Preparation of Surfaces:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Bonding Agents: These may not be used in lieu of metal lath or wire lath for
monolithic bonding of plaster to concrete ceilings or wall surfaces which require
more than 10 mm of plaster, to produce required lines or surfaces.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
General : The term Plaster shown on the drawings means Portland Cement
plaster unless otherwise noted. Apply 3-coat work on all bases. Apply finish coat
with a reasonably uniform thickness over entire surface with ceilings level and
with vertical surfaces flat, straight and plumb.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 5
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Make interior angles square, and make arises square but slightly rounded.
Solidly grout hollow metal frames occurring in plaster walls with plaster specified
for base or brown coat. Where casing beads do not occur at the juncture or
plaster and hollow metal frames, cut a groove in the base coat and later in the
finish coat to minimize the appearance of cracks at these joints.
B.
Mixing: Use mechanical mixers for mixing plaster. Hand mixing is not
permitted. Do not use frozen, caked or lumped material. Clean mechanical
mixers, mixing boxes and tools after mixing each batch; keep free of plaster from
previous mixes. Thoroughly mix plaster with proper amount of water until uniform
in colour and consistency. Re-tempering not permitted; discard plaster which has
begun to stiffen. Provide waterproof protection under mixer.
C.
D.
3.04
THICKNESS OF PLASTER
Portland Cement Plaster: Comply with ASTM C-926 or BS 5262 / 5492 as
appropriate for all applications not otherwise shown or specified.
3.05
A.
B.
Apply Portland Cement Plaster in accordance with ASTM 926 or BS 5262 / 5492
as applicable.
3.06
A.
Corner Beads : Provide on all external corners and arises and in single
lengths where the length of a corner or arises does not exceed the standard
stock lengths. Mitre or cope the beads at corners and fasten securely with tie
wires, hardened galvanized nails, staples or offset head or hook head lath nails
spaced not more than 200 mm staggered.
B.
Casing or Stop Beads : Provide where shown and where plastering terminates
and is not covered by other finish. Provide sheet metal closures at reveals. Set
the beads level, plumb and true on line. Install in lengths as long as is
practicable and align joints with concealed splice or tie plates.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 6
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Secure beads with tie wire, hardened galvanized nails or other accepted
methods. Space fastenings not more than 200 mm apart.
C.
Strip Lath: Where plaster is to be applied across differing backgrounds and over
chases provide strip lath 300 mm wide located centrally over joint; except that
where small widths of one material are involved completely bridge the one
material with mesh wide enough to extend 75 mm each side. Insert an isolating
membrane of building paper under lath to separate plaster from base material,
and bed lath in undercoat.
3.07
3.08
A.
Plaster Sampling : Samples may be taken from work in place at any time.
Areas represented by samples that show over standing or wrong aggregate
proportion will be rejected.
3.09
PATCHING
A.
B.
3.10
A.
B.
Protect plaster from the weather, premature drying, marking, dirt, dust, marring or
other damage throughout the construction period so that it will be without any
indication of damage at the time of Substantial Completion of the works.
END OF SECTION 09205
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09205- 7
LATH AND PLASTER
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Gypsum
Board Installations.
B.
ii
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Comply with the applicable specifications and standards of UL, ASTM, ANSI and
all other standards of manufacturers associations.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings :Submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings at full scale of all
unusual conditions in connection with gypsum board construction.
1.04
A.
B.
C.
Storage: Store materials above grade in a dry ventilated space, under cover and in
accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. Protect from soiling or
damage.
1.05
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Install gypsum board only when temperature, humidity and ventilation can be
maintained at or above levels recommended by gypsum wallboard manufacturer.
III-2/09250- 1
GYPSUM BOARD
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
Gypsum Drywall Board: 16mm thick, unless otherwise shown. Complying with
the following requirements
1.
Face Layer: ASTM C36, with tapered edges, Type X, unless stated
otherwise.
2.
3.
C.
D.
Joint Treatment Materials: Joint compound, joint tape and finishing compound.
ASTM C475, asbestos-free and materials recommended by the gypsum drywall
board manufacturer.
E.
Laminating Adhesive:
manufacturer.
F.
G.
Trim Accessories: Galvanized steel or plastic corner beads, edge trim and control
joints, of sizes and profiles as recommended by the gypsum drywall board
manufacturer to suit the intended use. Trim materials, profiles and sizes shall be
approved by the Engineer.
H.
I.
Ties: Comply with the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and the
gypsum drywall board manufacturer for the following types:
Type
gypsum
recommended
1.
2.
by
board
gypsum
comply
drywall
with
board
J.
K.
L.
2.
3.
Carrying Channels : Galvanized cold rolled steel channels38 ,mm, 0.7 kg/m.
III-2/09250- 2
GYPSUM BOARD
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
2.02
MIXES
A.
PART-3, EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine the substrates and adjoining construction and the conditions under which
the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Framing Members: Install framing members for drywall board in accordance with
ASTM C754, or more stringent requirements of the manufacturer, to produce rigid
flat, surfaces with supports at all edges of drywall board.
B.
C.
1.
2.
Gypsum Wall Board: Install gypsum wall board in accordance with ASTM 0840,
or more stringent requirements of the manufacturer, to produce rigid true surfaces
and to comply with required sound resistance ratings.
1.
2.
3.
Install metal trim accurately at exposed edges, doors and other locations
as shown. Fasten trim securely.
4.
Use joint compound and apply before inserting face layer into frame.
5.
6.
III-2/09250- 3
GYPSUM BOARD
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Base Layer: Apply on walls vertically with long joints on framing members.
Space screws at not more than 400mm centers.
2.
Face Layer: Screw, attach or apply face layer to base layer with laminating
adhesive, with joints on surface spaced 250mm from the parallel joints in
the base layer.
E.
F.
G.
H.
1.
2.
3.
In areas to receive ceramic tile finish, treat all joints and fastener heads
with water resistant compound.
Ceilings:
1.
Use only height adjustable rod hangers or strap hangers. Wire hangers are
not acceptable.
2.
3.
Provide sufficient hangers for runner channels on each side of light fixtures,
ceiling diffusers and grilles, access panels and other items penetrating the
ceiling.
4.
Fasten drywall board to furring channels at not more than 300mm centers.
2.
Reinforce all joints at tapered edges and interior corners with joint
reinforcing tape set in joint compound.
3.
Fill all joints, fastener heads, trim recesses, cracks and other depressions
with joint compound. Finish smooth and flush so that joints, screws and
other items will not be visible after painting.
III-2/09250- 4
GYPSUM BOARD
( )
________________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
A.
Tolerance: Finish surfaces within 6mm in 2.4m for plumb, level, warp and bow.
END OF SECTION 09250
III-2/09250- 5
GYPSUM BOARD
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09310
CERAMIC FLOOR AND WALL TILES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with ceramic
and quarry tile installation.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following:
Floor and Wall Tiles
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
B.
Obtain each material required for any one type and colour of the work from a single
source, so as to minimize variations in appearance and quality.
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The tile work shall be executed by a firm having a minimum of five (5) years
experience in the installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable
to this Project.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturers Data:
For each product or material used, submit manufacturers product data, including
installation instructions, use, limitations and recommendations. Provide
certifications stating that materials comply with requirements.
B.
Samples:
Submit the following duplicate samples: For each tile type, submit samples of four
tiles, each mounted on rigid panel board. Board shall include grouted joints.
Engineers acceptance shall be for colour, pattern, texture and joint width only
Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor
C.
Shop Drawings
Provide shop drawings for installation and erection of all parts of the work. Provide
plans, elevations and details where tiles terminate and at meeting of floor and
walls. Take measurements in the field and verify all dimensions before submitting
Shop Drawings.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 1
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
1.06
CO-ORDINATION
A.
Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other work. Verify
field dimensions and condition of work which adjoins material of this Section,
and notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract Documents before
proceeding with the work specified in this Section.
Commence work only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers, bucks, electrical and
mechanical work which are to be in or behind tile work are installed.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Method of installation of ceramic and quarry tile shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.
1.08
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Deliver to owner at his specified store unopened boxes of glazed and unglazed
tiles, 3% of installed area.
PART 2, PRODUCTS
2.01
TILE ACCESSORIES
A.
Trim Shapes: Shapes as shown for typical conditions, and as required to make a
complete installation at all conditions. Match type, class, colour and edge of
adjoining field units and co-ordinate sizes with field units.
2.02
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Water: Clear and without deleterious substances which would impair the work.
D.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 2
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
and
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.03
A.
Latex Mortar Setting Beds: One 1) part Portland cement with three (3) parts sand
mixed dry and then gauged with a sufficient quantity of liquid latex additive to bring
the cement setting bed to the proper consistency for placing. Amount of gauging
liquid required and the consistency of cement setting bed for using a dry tamp
method shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the liquid latex additive.
B.
Liquid Latex Mortar (Thin Set): Liquid latex additive and Portland cement mixed in
a ratio of 2.25 kg Portland cement to one litre liquid latex manufacturer. Addition of
fine sand to cement shall be only as necessary for filling rough surfaces and as
recommended by the liquid latex manufacturer.
1. Use of the above is required for all thin set applications and as slurry bond coats
at mortar and bed applications.
Latex Quarry Tile Grout: One (1) part Portland cement with one (1) part sand, or
factory prepared floor tile grout, gauged with liquid latex. The amount of gauging
liquid and consistency of grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of
the liquid latex additive.
C.
Grout for Non-Vitreous Tiles: Colour as shown or as required, gauged with grout
admix.
D.
Grout for Vitreous Tiles: Colour as shown or as required, gauged with grout admix.
E.
Tile Adhesive: Water-resistant ceramic tile adhesive complying with ANSI A 136.1
and as recommended by the manufacturer to suit the type of application.
F.
2.04
SEALANT
A.
Sealant for tiles shall be based on silicone type recommended for tile work. Colour
to match adjoining tile colour.
PART-3, EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conditions which would adversely affect this work. Do not
commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been
sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.
B.
Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute
acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator that shall from that time be
responsible for the satisfactory results of his work and any defects occurring
thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Engineer.
C.
D.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 3
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
E.
Underlayment used to correct floor slabs with surfaces not constructed to specified
tolerances shall be provided as part of the work in CONCRETE Division. However,
small dips and minor imperfections on the floor surface shall be corrected using
specified latex leveling mortar as part of the work under this Section.
F.
G.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove
curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of
specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.
B.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
The tile applicator shall install all tiles using lighting conditions that will represent
the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. This requirement will be
insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out tiles.
D.
Tiles shall be applied to full wall areas where mirrors and surface mounted
accessories are to be installed.
E.
Surfaces to receive tile finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter
detrimental to the bond.
F.
Room temperatures at areas in which tile materials are being installed shall be
maintained at not less than 4 Deg. F. (5 Deg. C) for a period of twenty-four hours
prior to commencement of work, during work, and afterwards until completion of
construction. Areas in which tile work is being done shall be closed to traffic until
the installation has set.
G.
As far as possible, lay out work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align
joints in floor tile at right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to
patterns selected. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile. Co-ordinate
with plumbing and other trades.
H.
Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from
level and plumb and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown:
1.
Floors: 1/1000 run, any direction; +/- 3 mm at any location8.0 ;mm offset at
any location
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 4
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Walls: 1/800 run, any direction; +/- 3 mm at any location; 0.8 mm offset at
any location.
I.
Joints: +/-0.8 mm joint with variation at any location; 1/600run for deviation from
I.Lay out tile work in pattern shown using field tile and trim shapes as shown
Centre tile fields both directions in each space or on each wall area and adjust to
minimize tile cutting Use uniform joint widths for ceramic tile and for quarry tile
unless otherwise shown or approved. Cut field tile, not trim shapes, unless
otherwise shown.
J.
Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces
shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without
interruptions except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required
complying with requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and
corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
K.
Liquid Latex Mortar Thin-Set Installation: Use liquid latex mortar for thin-set tile
work, unless otherwise shown.
L.
Latex Mortar Setting Beds for Quarry Tiles: Install quarry tiles over latex mortar
setting beds with a slurry bond coat of Liquid Latex Mortar as hereinbefore specified.
M.
Adhesive Installation: Use appropriate adhesive for setting tiles where adhesive
installation is shown.
Non-Slip Tile Installation: Use non-slip tiles in areas shown as Non- Slip. Install as
specified for normal ceramic tiles of the same type and class.
Metal Edge Strip Installation: Install a continuous stainless steel edge strip
adequately anchored into the substrate; as follows:
1. Where shown.
2. Where exposed edge of quarry tile flooring meets carpet or other soft floor
covering.
P.
Provide control joints or expansion joints where shown, or required by ANSI or TCA
standard or by job condition for proper workmanship. Install removable divider strip
of proper width and depth of the tile and setting bed. Remove strips after grouting
tiles and properly curing the work, Install joint fillers and sealants, in control joints
and expansion joints, of type as recommended by the tiling manufacturer.
3.04
GROUTING
A.
Do not commence grouting for at least 24-hours after placing of tile .Follow specific
instructions of listed standards. Mix and apply in strict accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
B.
Grout wall and floor tiles with indicated grout mixed to a workable stiff consistency
in accordance with manufacturers directions.
C.
Force maximum grout into joints with trowel or squeegee. Before grout sets, strike
or tool joints to base of cushion and fill all skips and gaps. Do not permit setting
bed materials to show through grouted joints. Cure grout joints by maintaining
damp condition.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 5
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.05
SEALANT APPLICATION
A.
Apply silicone sealant in joints where ceramic tile terminates at thresholds, floor
drains, control joints in walls and other areas indicated. Co-ordinate with trades
affecting these items.
Application of sealant shall conform to applicable requirements set forth under
SEALANTS AND CAULKING Section. Requirements therein shall become a part
of the work under this Section as though written out in full herein.
3.06
A.
After tile has thoroughly set, sponge and wash tile thoroughly and diagonally
across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage tile or
adjacent materials. Do not use acid cleaners. Finally, clean all tiles using dry
cloths.
B.
Remove from the site and legally dispose of at the end of each day, all cartons,
rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Section.
C.
Protect tiles after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other approved
coverage until acceptance of the building.
3.07
MAINTENANCE LITERATURE
A.
Upon completion of all work specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Owners Representative, literature on the Care of Quarry Tiles for future
maintenance use.
END OF SECTION 09310
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09310- 6
CERAMIC FLOOR TILES
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09420
PRE-CAST TERRAZO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Pre-cast
Terrazzo tiles.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with
applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:
NTMA - Terrazzo Specifications, Details and Technical Data.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The terrazzo work shall be performed by a firm having 5 years experience in the
installation of materials specified herein on projects comparable to this Project.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing large scale details of layout,
jointing and edge conditions, and showing plans for layout of work. Include details of
anchorage and other special features required.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-1
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
A.
B.
Store materials above grade, protected from the weather, soiling or damage from
any source. Store in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
1.07
CO-ORDINATION
A.
Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other work. Verify
field dimensions and condition of work, which adjoins materials of this Section, and
notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract Documents before proceeding
with the work specified in this Section.
Commence work of this Section only after work of other Sections, to be covered by
terrazzo tiles, has been installed.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
B.
Precast Steps: One-piece full width of stair incorporating tread and riser size to suit
step.
C.
Face section of terrazzo units shall consist of Portland Cement conforming to ASTM
C-150 Type I, non-staining white marble chips, selected natural aggregate (clean
and free of all impurities), and background cement and colours. Aggregate
proportion shall be not less than 70% selected aggregate and 30% matrix. No
aggregate with a value below Ha 10 as tested for abrasion resistance (ASTM C-241)
shall be used.
D.
Back or underlaying section of terrazzo units shall consist of Portland Cement and
coarse sand. Back section shall have a cement/sand ratio of 1:3.
E.
Terrazzo units shall be compressed to produce the exact size as per drawings with
square, flush edges. Compressive strength shall be minimum of 280 Kg/cm2 when
tested in accordance with ASTM C-150 after curing for one day in moist air and 6
days in water.
F.
Marble chips shall be natural sound marble chips without flats or flakes of sizes and
colours necessary to match sample.
G.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-2
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
2.02
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
B.
Sand: shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay, soluble
salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-to-coarse
within the following limits: 100% passing No. 8 sieve, 90% to 100% passing No. 16
sieve, 60% to 90% passing No. 30 sieve 25% to 55% passing No. 50 sieve and 0 to
15% passing No. 100 sieve.
C.
Water: shall be clean, free from oils, acids, alkalis, organic and other injurious
matter.
D.
2.03
ADDITIONAL MATERIALS
A.
Metal Divider Strips: shall be of white metal zinc alloy, 3mm thick top angle shape
approved by the Engineer. Overall depth shall suit conditions of the job.
B.
C.
Terrazzo Sealing Compound: shall be penetrating type, free from harmful alkali or
acid content. Sealer shall be specially prepared for the terrazzo trade. Compound
shall not be yellow terrazzo or leave tacky finish on surface after buffing.
2.04
A.
Mix bedding mortar in accordance with Tile Council of America Specifications for
Conventional Cement Mortar and ANSI A108.1, 1976.
B.
Mortar bed mix shall be one part Portland Cement, 6 parts damp sand and upto 1/10
part hydrated lime by volume.
C.
When mixed with water, the mortar shall be of such consistency and workability to
allow maximum compaction during tamping of mortar bed.
D.
Grout shall be inorganic Portland Cement dry curing grout, ready to use with addition
of water. The Engineer shall select colour of grout.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-3
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify Engineer
in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work. Do not commence
work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions has been sent to the
Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or waived.
B.
Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute
acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that time be
responsible for the satisfactory results of his work and any defects occurring
thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the Engineer.
C.
D.
E.
Underlayment used to correct floor slabs with surfaces not constructed to specified
tolerances shall be carried out in a manner approved by the Engineer. However,
small dips and minor imperfections on the floor surface shall be corrected using
specified latex levelling mortar as part of the work under this Section.
F.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Etch substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove
curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of
specified mortar for tiles. Rinse with water to remove all traces of acid.
B.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Surfaces to receive tile finish shall be clean and free of all foreign matter detrimental
to the bond.
C.
Room temperatures at areas in which tile materials are being installed shall be
maintained at not less than 4 deg. F. (5 Deg. C) for a period of twenty-four hours
prior to commencement of work, during work, and afterwards until completion of
construction. Areas in which tile work is being done shall be closed to traffic until the
installation has set.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-4
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
D.
As far as possible, layout work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints
in floor tiles at right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to
patterns selected. Verify locations of accessories before installing tile. Coordinate
with plumbing and other trades.
E.
Allowable Variations in Finished Work: Do not exceed the following deviations from
level and plumb and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown:
1.
Floors: 1/1000 run, any directions; +/- 3 mm at any location; 0.8mm offset
at any location.
2.
Joints: +/- 0.8mm joint with variation at any location; 1/800 run for deviation
from plumb and true; and for other variations in alignment of joints.
F.
Extend tile work into recesses and under equipment and fixtures in the spaces
shown or scheduled to receive tiles. Form a complete covering without interruptions
except for control and expansion joints as shown and as required complying with
requirements. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and corners without
disruption of pattern or joint alignments.
3.04
A.
Mix and apply mortar bed in accordance with Tile Council of America Specifications
for conventional Cement Mortar and ANSI A108.1. When mixed with water the
mortar mix shall be of such consistency or workability as to promote maximum
density, determined by stroking of mortar surface with a trowel. When of correct
consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a smooth, slickened appearance.
Screed and tap mortar bed firmly. Mortar beds shall be in thickness required,
determined by the depression. Any required pitch, which is not already in the slab,
must be provided in the mortar bed.
B.
While the mortar bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows:
Trowel or brush a thin layer 1 mm to 1.5 mm in thickness, of neat Portland Cement
paste over the bed and/or the back of tile. A thin layer of dry Portland cement 1 mm.
to 1.5 mm. thick over the setting bed worked lightly with a trowel may be permitted.
These areas (mortar bed and cement paste) shall be limited to what can be covered
with tile before the mortar bed sets. Tile shall be pressed firmly into the bed, tamping
with wood blocks to obtain smooth surface. All tiles shall be aligned properly with
straight joints in even widths. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after
placing tile. Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer
to drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout to
receive sealant.
3.05
CONTROL JOINTS
A.
Cut through setting beds at perimeter joints and at projections through the floor.
Install neoprene or butyl rubber strip (Shore A Hardness 70) full depth of setting bed.
Caulking of joint with approved pouring grade sealant will be done under Sealants
Section.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-5
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Provide control joints where floor tiles meet restraining surfaces such as perimeter
walls, cove bases, curbs, columns, pipes, etc. Control joints shall not exceed 10
meters c.c. each way in floors, located as directed by Engineer. Form control joints in
neat, straight lines. Cut tile cleanly and to accurate radius at exposed junctions with
pipes, etc. Tile control joints shall be same width as grouted joints, but not less than
6 mm.
C.
Fill control joints that will be exposed in the finished work to full depth of setting beds
from sub-surface to rear face of tile, with control joint backing. Keep remaining void
clear of grout and debris. After completion of grouting operations, control joint
sealant of colour to match adjoining grout will be applied under Sealants Section.
3.06
A.
Install white alloy or zinc divider strips adequately anchored into the substrate; as
follows: 1.
At 2 M centres in both directions.
2.
Between terrazzo tiles and dissimilar floor finish where thresholds do not
occur. Where divider strips are located across door openings, locate strip on
the door side, in line with the edge of doorstop, terminating at the rebate.
3.07
GROUTING
A.
Do not commence grouting for at least 24 hours after placing of tiles. Follow specific
instructions of listed standards and apply in strict accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
3.08
A.
Cleaning: After tile has thoroughly set, sponge and wash tile thoroughly and
diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to damage tile
or adjacent materials. Do not use acid cleaners.
B.
Sealing: As soon as terrazzo surfaces are thoroughly dry, apply sealer. The sealing
shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturers directions, leaving a polished
surface approved by the Engineer.
3.09
A.
Protect tiles after cleaning and sealing with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other
approved coverage. Replace torn or worn papers until acceptance of the building.
B.
Remove from the site and legally dispose of at the end of each day, all cartons,
rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Section.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-6
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
_________________________________________________________________________________________
3.10
MAINTENANCE LITERATURE
A.
Upon completion of all work specified herein, the Contractor shall furnish to the
Owners representative, literature on the Care of Terrazzo for future maintenance
use.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09420-7
PRECAST TERRAZZO
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09450
STONE CLADDING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
The principal work of this Section mainly includes, but may not be limited to
the following:
1.
1.02
A.
4. ASTM C99
5. ASTM C119
6. ASTM A123
7. ASTM A153-82
8. ASTM A167-82
9. ASTM C176
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-1
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
14. ASTMC503-79
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work for approval, and obtain
approval prior to fabrication of stone.
1. Shop drawings shall indicate and show the following:
a. Showing in detail the layout, jointing, dimensions sizes and locations of
cutouts, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall
correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone.
Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere (flashing,
insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this submittal.
Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.
b. Indicate materials, sizes, shapes, and thickness including dimensions of
each panel, finishes and fabrication tolerances.
c. Details of setting and anchorage system including type, size, weight,
gauge or diameter of anchors and supports, materials identification and
installation methods for anchors, fasteners, clips, dowels and supports.
Provide detail of steel back-up support over masonry wall surface.
d. Erection method and other relevant information.
e. Jointing clearances and clearances between the units and the structural
building framework.
f.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-2
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.05
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A.
Design, fabricate and install the Stone work and anchorage systems to
support the gravity loads and to withstand the inward and outward pressures
normal to the wall plane as per the Wind Pressure Diagrams based on local
regulation.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-3
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.06
A.
TESTING
Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone will be performed
prior to all other testing programs.
1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the
following tests:
Physical Property
a. Compressive Strength
b. Modules of Rupture
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
c. Flexure Bending
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
d. Density
e. Absorption (% by weight)
Test Method
No. of Tests
ASTM C1170
ASTM C99
2
4
4
ASTM C880
ASTM C97
ASTM C97
4
4
2
2
2. Above samples shall be taken at random locations from areas, which will
be quarried for the Project. Do not take all the samples from a single
block. Identify and transmit a record of the samples and quarry locations
from which they were taken.
3. Based on the properties of Stone as determined by the above test
program, the Engineer may revise the design safety factor as specified.
B.
C.
1.07
VISUAL MOCK-UPS
A.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-4
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary precautions
against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using protection and
handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no leakage, chipping,
soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other damage. Store above grade
on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces using polyethylene film to
separate Stone from wood or other supporting or protecting members.
Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of every kind.
B.
C.
Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and
installation shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.09
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide 2% extra stock of stone of each type and colour and pattern. Store
where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type stone code and
dimensions.
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
2.01.1 STONE
A.
2.
3.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-5
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SUPPLIERS:
1. Al-Naseeb International for Granite & Marble
Farwaniya
Tele: 24758305
2. Taj Mahal for Granite & Marble
Industrial Streel, Shuwaikh
Tele: 24818544
3. Al-Ahmadi for Marble & Granite
Ahmadi
Tele: 23984233
4. Or other Equal Approved
2.03
FIXINGS
A.
2.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-6
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
Accurately cut, dress, drill, fit and finish Stone-work to shapes and
dimensions shown on Drawing and approved shop-drawings. Make expose
plane surfaces true in line and exposed curved surfaces true in radius.
Thickness of Stone shown is minimum. Any deviation below these minimums
will cause rejection and replacement of those Stone panels.
B.
C.
The Contractor shall supplement the general design shown with more detailed
shop drawing. Shop drawings shall include major aspects of the system
proposed, such as sections, shapes, show how temperature movement is
handled, joint connections, anchorage to building, and moisture weeping
system.
PART-3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
B.
C.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-7
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Mechanical Fix:
1. Stone setting, anchoring, and pointing shall be in accordance with
applicable requirements of specifications of the Marble Institute of
American unless otherwise specified or shown.
2. Set Stone in accordance with approved shop drawings, level, plumb,
square and true with uniform joints, accurately aligned with grain running
in the direction shown. Match work to visual mock-up.
3. After all adjustment have been made to Stone work anchorage devices;
weld adjustable supports so as to prevent future displacement or
movement. All welds will be subjected to visual inspection.
4. The quality of field cutting shall be the same as for shop cutting.
5. Provide dowels, anchors and ties in sufficient quantity to eliminate rattle
or loose pieces and to ensure a rigid installation. Extent of anchorage and
installation details shown is intended to indicate minimum requirements.
In general, a minimum of one anchor per 0.18 sq. meter of area is
required, with additional anchorage provided where necessitated by size,
thickness, setting of shape.
6.
B.
Provide steels back-up support for Stone work over masonry surface
area as required providing rigid installation. Anchor steel support framing
securely to building structure (over concrete Beams, columns etc.). Do
not provide the steel anchor support directly over the masonry wall.
C.
Joint Widths: Provide Stone work joints widths as approved by the Engineer.
3.03
PROTECTION
A.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-8
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.04
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.05
ENGINEERS APPROVAL
A.
__________________________________________________________________________________
III-2/09450-9
STONE CLADDING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09510
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
PART 1 : GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances and materials and performing all operations in connection with Metal
Ceilings and accessories.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the following :
Suspended Metal Acoustical Ceiling.
1.02
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Comply with the Codes and Standards of the following Agencies as further cited
herein:
1.
2.
ASTM E 84
ASTM E 90
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Employ only experienced tradesmen who are capable of producing work of the highest
standard of quality in the industry. Acoustical ceilings shall be executed by an
approved specialist
Sub-Contractor.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09510- 1
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.04
A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples :
Submit to the Engineer samples of each type of acoustical material specified. Each set
of samples shall show the full range of texture and colour to be expected in the
completed work. Sample submittal and Engineers acceptance will be for colour and
texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of
the Contractor.
1.
Acoustic Tile full size.
2.
Exposed Tees and Moldings 300 mm lengths.
B.
Shop Drawings :
Submit to the Engineer detailed shop drawings, including reflected ceiling plans of
acoustical ceilings, before proceeding with work. Show location of all items of work
which are to be coordinated with the acoustical ceilings or are to be supported by the
acoustical ceiling system and detail, in suitably large scales, all edge conditions, fixing
details and accessories. Scales to be approved by the Engineer.
C.
1.06
MOCK-UP
A.
Provide 3 x 3.6 m mock-up of each type of acoustical ceiling, including all services
outlets such as sprinklers, supply and return air grilles lighting fixtures, etc., in spaces
within the building to be designated by the Engineer. Mock-up shall be representative
of the finished work in all respects and may, when approved, form part of the
permanent work.
1.07
A.
B.
Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent damage,
deterioration and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials which have been
damaged, or are otherwise unfit for use, as directed.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09510- 2
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install acoustical materials unless temperature and humidity conditions closely
approximate to the interior conditions which will exist when the building is occupied.
Maintain temperature / humidity conditions before, during and after installation.
Plastering, concrete and tiling work (including grinding) shall be complete and dry.
Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.
1.09
EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 1% of installed quantity of each type of acoustic tile to Employer and store
where directed.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS GENERALLY
Material type and face size as shown with the following minimum characteristics:
1.
Light Reflectance: 80-85%
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.02
A.
2.03
A.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09510- 3
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and the conditions under which the
work is to be installed and do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.
3.02
A.
Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and co-ordinate the work
with the work of other trades, with particular attention given to the work of mechanical
and electrical trades.
B.
Install all materials and systems in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions
unless otherwise shown or directed.
C.
Make all exposed surfaces of acoustical units level and flush with all joints straight and
true. Neatly cut and fit units around light fixtures and around other items protruding
through acoustical ceilings. Install all exposed members with flush hairline joints.
D.
E.
Factory drill acoustic tile occurring at hidden loud-speakers and fire alarm gongs.
Centre tile or board pattern both directions in each major space or room as shown or
directed and where possible adjust pattern so that edge pieces will be not less than 1/2
unit in width.
F.
Run grain of units in one direction, as shown or directed and align joints in both
directions unless otherwise shown.
G.
Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during installation.
Replace units which are damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed.
3.03
A.
B.
Co-ordinate spacing of hangers, carrying channels, runners and moulding with the
location of electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling.
C.
Hangers : Space not more than 150 mm from each end and not more than 100
mm o.c. between ends of members to be supported. Provide additional
hangers for support of fixtures and other items to be supported by the ceiling
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09510- 4
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________________
Mouldings : Provide mouldings where ceilings meet walls, partitions and other
vertical elements.
Provide meter cut inside and outside corners.
D.
Co-ordinate spacing of hangers and other suspension members with the location of
electrical fixtures and other items occurring in or on the ceiling. Provide additional
members or heavier members where necessary to suit interferences.
3.04
A.
Install tiles with edges resting on flanges of tees. Cut and fit tiles neatly against
abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall mouldings.
3.05
A.
Upon completion of the work remove all unused materials, debris, containers and
equipment from the project site. Clean and repair surfaces that have been stained,
marred or otherwise damaged.
B.
Protect acoustical ceilings during the construction period to prevent damage, replace
damaged units with new.
END OF SECTION 09510
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09510- 5
METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09515
ACOUSTIC GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Provide Gypsum Board Ceilings in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, which including but not limited to the followings:
1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system
2. Gypsum Panels (Plain or Decorative) Jointless Ceiling
3. Perimeter trims
4. Sound Absorbing pad if indicated or specified.
1.02
RELATED WORK
1. Access doors.
2. Integrated Ceilings
3. Light Fixtures in ceiling system
0B
REFERENCES
1. ASTM C 423
2. ASTM C 523
3. ASTM C 635
4. ASTM 84
5. ASTM 90
6. BS CP 290
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-1
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system
and suspended ceiling panels with ten years minimum experience.
1.06
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Indicate on shop drawings, grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other
work or ceiling finisher, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to
system.
C.
D.
Submit samples.
E.
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.09
SEQUENCING / SCHEDULING
A.
Do not install gypsum board ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient cooling is
provided, dust-generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is
completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Schedule installation of gypsum board ceiling after interior wet work is dry.
C.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-2
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Obtain gypsum boards, trim accessories, adhesives and joint treatment products
from a single manufacturer or from manufacturers recommended by the prime
manufacturer of gypsum boards.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1.
2.
D.
Accessories, joint treatment materials, fasteners, stud and furring channels, etc.
shall be integrated systems.
E.
Sound absorption pads (if required) : Line with sound-absorbent blanket encased
in flameproof membrane and supported on wire grid spacers. Form blanket of
glass fiber or mineral wool insulating material having a minimum density of 16
Kg/cu.m. and a minimum thickness as required to provide a noise reduction
coefficient of not less than 0.75 for the complete assembly, moisture absorption
not exceeding 2.0% by weight.
2.02
A.
Grid: ASTM C635, light, intermediate, heavy duty, non-fire rated exposed T / one
direction concealed T and concealed H and T paired access T downward access
removable T concealed Z concealed T metal pan T; components: die cut and
interlocking.
B.
Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate, fire rated to 1 hour assembly two directional
concealed components die cut and interlocking.
C.
Accessories: Stabilizer bars clips splices edge mouldings, hold down clips required
for suspended grid system.
D.
Grid Materials: commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating.
E.
F.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized primed steel; size and type to suit
application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical
and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-3
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________
2.03
A.
2. Composition
: Gypsum board
3. Surface Finish
4.
Thickness
5.
Light reflectance
: 75 percent
6.
7.
Surface Color
: White or as selected
8.
Grid
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A.
Verify that existing conditions and work finished by other section is ready to
receive work.
B.
Verify hangers to be properly fixed and positioned so a not to interfere with other
work.
C.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Install after major above ceiling work is completed. Coordinate the location of
hangers with other work.
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-4
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
( )
__________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Supply hangers of inserts for installation with instructions for their correct
placement. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the
installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection provide additional hangers
and inserts as requires.
E.
Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent
members.
F.
Where ducts of other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce
the nearest affected spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers
and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G.
Center and locate system on room axis leaving equal border units according to
reflected plan and shop drawings.
H.
I.
J.
Install edge moulding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest
practical lengths. Miter corner: Provide edge moulding at junctions with other
interruptions. Field ribbett tile panel edge. Where bullnose concrete block corners
round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match edge moulding.
K.
L.
Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges of the defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
M.
Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest shortest
room axis in basket weave pattern. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces.
N.
O.
Install light fixture boxes constructed of gypsum board above light fixture in
accordance with UL assembly requirements.
3.03
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
Variation from plumb of grid members caused by eccentric loads: Two degrees
maximum.
END OF SECTION
________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-9/09515-5
GYPSUM BOARD CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09535
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances, and materials and performing all operations in
connection with Glass Reinforced Gypsum (GRG) Ceilings and accessories.
B.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
Prefabricated plain and vaulted GRG ceiling units with site applied
painted finish.
3.
4.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Two full size samples of each type of panel showing full profile,
reinforcing and finish.
2.
One full size sample of each type of bulkhead waffle and grid showing
reinforcing and finish.
3.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-1
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
1.03
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.04
MOCK-UP
A.
1.05
PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
Structural: The GRG system, when installed, shall not develop structural
failure, joint failure, cracking, crazing, permanent distortion or displacement or
other damage. Permanent distortion and displacement are defined as values
exceeding 50% of installation tolerances.
B.
The maximum temporary deflection due to all loads shall not exceed 1/360 of
the distance between supports.
C.
Design, fabricate and install component parts and all associated supporting
and suspension system so that no movement will occur which might abrade
abutting members, loosen fastenings or anchorage or cause other detrimental
effects.
D.
Fire Resistance: The GRG units shall have ratings not exceeding the
following when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84:
1.
Flame Spread
2.
Fuel Contributed
3.
Smoke Developed
E.
1.06
A.
Protect GRG units during transit, storage, and installation, store above grade
on dunnage so as to avoid damage of any kind all in accordance with the
manufacturers printed instructions.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-2
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
1.07
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install GRG units unless temperature and humidity conditions closely
approximate to the interior conditions, which will exist when the building is
occupied. Maintain temperature/humidity conditions before, during, and after
installation. Plastering, concrete and tiling work (including grinding) shall be
complete and dry. Windows and doors shall be in place and glazed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, AISI Type 302 or Type 304, gauge and finish
as recommended by the GRG manufacturer.
F.
G.
Steel Angles, Plates, Bars Rods and Other Steel Accessories to Join,
Reinforce or suspend Assemblies: ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 283, galvanised
and painted, where exposed to match GRG units.
H.
J.
K.
L.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-3
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
2.02
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate units to the shapes shown. Provide integral rib and edge reinforcing
for units as necessary for loads and handling stresses, and for anchorage
reinforcing where shown and where required. Provide necessary openings,
reveals, supports, etc., for electrical and HVAC installation.
B.
2.
3.
4.
+/- 1.6 mm
+/- 1.6 mm
+/- 1.6 mm
Thickness
+/- 3 mm
C.
The finished product shall be free of visual defects, such as foreign matter,
dry spots, air bubbles, pin holes and pimples. Identifying markings shall not
appear on any exposed surface.
2.03
FINISH
A.
Factory Finish: Alkyd enamel painting applied to give a total minimum dry film
thickness of 3.5 mils (0.09 mm) in semi-gloss, eggshell or flat finish and of
colour, all as approved by the Engineer.
B.
2.04
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1.
2.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-4
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and fabricate
bulkhead waffles to precisely fit as-built dimensions of erected prestressed
concrete beams.
B.
Install all materials and systems as shown on the Drawings and approved
shop drawings and in accordance with the GRG manufacturers instructions.
C.
Make all exposed abutting surfaces of units level, plumb, true to curve and
flush with all joints straight and true.
D.
Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during
installation. Do not erect units, which are damaged or defaced to such extent
as to impair strength or appearance. Replace units, which are damaged, or
cannot be adequately repaired or cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E.
F.
Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Comply with the
following erection tolerances:
1.
3 mm in 6 m
2.
Joint alignment
+/- 0.8 mm
3.
Joint Width
+ 0.8 mm 0.0 mm
4.
+/- 0.8 mm
G.
Paint all surfaces designated for site applied finish, as specified in the
Painting Section.
3.03
CLEANING
A.
Upon completion of the work thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces using
materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer. All surface stains
shall be removed by means compatible with paint finish as recommended by
the manufacturer.
B.
Protect exposed surfaces during the construction period so that they will be
without any indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of
the Works.
END OF SECTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09535-5
GLASS REINFORCED GYPSUM
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09545
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Work included - The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to
the followings:
1.02
1.
2.
3.
RELATED WORK
1.
Access doors.
2.
Integrated Ceilings
3.
4.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.
a.
ASTM B 209
b.
ASTM C 635
c.
ASTM E 84
2.
a.
BS CP 290
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-1
LINEAR METAL CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
1.04
PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA
A.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
2.
3.
4.
5.
End caps.
B.
C.
1.06
1.07
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
B.
Store materials in a dry location, off the ground and in a manner to prevent
damage, deterioration, and intrusion of foreign matter. Replace materials,
which have been damaged or are otherwise unfit for use, as directed.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-2
LINEAR METAL CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS GENERALLY
A.
Material type and face size as shown with the following minimum
characteristics:
2.02
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
MANUFACTURERS
Approved manufacturers for the products specified in this section are as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The contractor shall submit catalogues with data and specifications for the
above products for Engineers approval. The Engineer has the sole discretion
to approve or select the product, as he thinks reasonable. In this regard
Engineers decision shall be considered as final.
2.03
A.
Metal Panel: Aluminium roll formed sheet, alloy AA5050. Similar to Luxalon
type 84R (Hunter Douglas).
1.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-3
LINEAR METAL CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
2.04
A.
Width and length to fill completely between carriers joined at the center of a
panel. Manufacturers standard sound-absorbent blanket encased in
flameproof membrane and supported on wire grid spacers. Form blanket of
glass fiber or mineral wool insulating material having a minimum density and
a minimum thickness as required to provide a noise reduction coefficient of
not less than 0.75 for the complete assembly, moisture absorption not
exceeding 2.0% by weight.
2.05
A.
B.
C.
Carrying Channels: Galvanized cold rolled steel channels, 38 mm, 0.7 Kg/m.
2.06
A.
B.
2.07
EXPOSED TRIM
A.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-4
LINEAR METAL CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine the substrates and adjoining construction, and the conditions under
which the work is to be installed, and do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work have been corrected.
3.02.
A.
Verify all measurements and dimensions at the project site and coordinate the
work with the work of other trades, with particular attention given to the work
of mechanical and electrical trades.
B.
C.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of linear metal panel units to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less
than half width units at borders and comply with reflected ceiling plans.
D.
Make all exposed surfaces of panels level and flush with all joints straight and
true. Neatly cut and fit units around light fixtures and around other items
protruding through ceilings.
E.
Factory drill panels occurring at hidden loudspeakers and fire alarm gongs.
F.
Run grain of units in one direction, as shown or directed, and align joints in
both directions unless otherwise shown.
G.
H.
Use procedures that will minimize damage or soiling of the units during
installation. Replace units, which are damaged or cannot be adequately
cleaned as directed.
3.03
A.
B.
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-5
LINEAR METAL CEILING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________
2.
Hangers: Space not more than 150mm from each end and not more
than 100mm O.C. between ends of members to be supported. Provide
additional hangers for support of fixtures and other items to be
supported by the ceiling suspension system, as required to prevent
eccentric deflection or rotation of supporting runners.
a.
3.
C.
3.04
A.
Upon completion of the work remove all unused materials, debris, containers,
and equipment from the project site. Clean and repair surfaces that have
been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged in accordance with
manufacturers instructions. Remove or replace work, which cannot be
successfully cleaned or repaired.
B.
Protect ceilings during the construction period so that they will be without any
indication of deterioration or damage at the time of completion of the works.
END OF SECTION
__________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09545-6
LINEAR METAL CEILING
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09600
STONE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Scope of Work: Stone Work shall include Marble, Stone and Granite flooring,
skirting, counter, steps (treads & riser), etc. all in accordance with the
Drawings and Bills of Quantities.
B.
C.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Stone flooring
Stone Skirting
Stone to Staircases
Stone for Counters
Mortar materials for setting Stone.
1.02
A.
B.
C.
1.03
2.
3.
ASTM C97
4.
ASTM C99
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-1
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
5.
ASTM C119
6.
ASTM A123
7.
ASTM A153-82
8.
ASTM A167-82
9.
ASTM C176
A480M-83A
14. ASTMC503-79
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the
fabrication of Stone-work units of similar sizes, shapes and finishes to the
units required for this Project and which has ample production facilities to
produce, furnish and supply the units as required for installation without
delay to the work.
B.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-2
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work showing in detail
the layout, jointing, anchors and dowels, dimensions, sizes and locations
of cut-outs, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall
correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone.
Special attention shall be given over the curved/circular areas of Stone
floor & clad. In such areas smaller sizes stone shall be required to match
the curvature. Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere
(flashing, insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this
submittal. Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.
B. Samples: Submit to the Engineer 600 x 600mm samples of each type
and finish of Stone required, showing the full range of color and texture
expected in the finished work; in addition submit one (1) full size sample
of each type and finish, falling in the average color and texture range.
Engineers review and approval of samples shall be for color, texture, and
pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor. Provide also 400 x 400mm Stone sample
panels with central cross joint to show sealant materials for the
Engineers review and selection of jointing materials.
C. Manufacturers Literature: Submit manufacturers data sheet or
equivalent printed literature indicating product information correlated to
specified requirements. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions.
D. Certification: After review of samples by Engineer and prior to fabrication
certify in writing and submit any additional evidence required indicating
that a sufficient quantity of materials within the range of approved
materials is available from a single quarry, for each specified or approved
Stone to satisfy the total requirements of the Project.
1.06
TESTING
A. Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone will be performed
prior to all other testing programs.
1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the
following tests:
Physical Property
a. Compressive Strength
b. Modules of Rupture
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
c. Flexure Bending
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
d. Density
e. Absorption (% by weight)
Test Method
ASTM C1170
ASTM C99
No. of Tests
2
4
4
ASTM C880
ASTM C97
ASTM C97
4
4
2
2
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-3
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
SAMPLES
A.
Submit in suitable containers samples of all grout, cement, sealant, and other
materials specified herein to the Engineer for approval.
B.
C.
The samples submitted shall show range in quality, colour and finish that will
occur in the material used on the job. Where there is little variation in
character an average single sample in lieu of duplicate may be submitted.
The approved samples shall become the standard for selection and finish of
the materials furnished under this Contract. All subsequent work shall comply
with approved samples.
1.08
VISUAL MOCK-UPS
Following approval of sample slabs construct mock up as follows:
1.
1.09
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary
precautions against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using
protection and handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no
leakage, chipping, soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other
damage. Store above grade on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces
using polyethylene film to separate marble from wood or other supporting
or protecting members. Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of
every kind.
B. Deliver other materials, except bulk materials, to project site in
manufacturers unopened containers with name, brand, type, grade, and
color fully indicated thereon. Store bulk materials as required to avoid any
deleterious effects of weather, soiling or contamination.
C. Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and
installation shall be borne by the Contractor.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-4
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
1.10
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide 2% extra stock of stone of each type and colour and pattern. Store
where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type stone code and
dimensions.
1.11
WARRANTIES
A.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their warranties for work under this Section.
However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities, which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
STONE WORK
A.
B.
Stone Types: All Stone shall be of soundness (hardness and density), texture,
graining colour tone, and range matching the sample approved by the
Engineer.
1.
C.
requirement
of
Suppliers:
1.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-5
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
4.
2.02
A.
Cement: used for conventional setting beds shall be standard brand Portland
Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type II. Cement used where
exposed for joints shall be non-staining, conforming to ASTM C-91. Colour to
be selected by the Engineer.
B.
Cement Colouring: Cement used for grouting exposed joints shall be mixed
with approved non-fading, acid resistant pigmented colour as approved by the
Engineer.
C.
Sand: used in cement beds shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free
from silt, loam, clay, soluble salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to
ASTM C-144 and graded fine to coarse within the following limits: 100%
passing 16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing 30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing 50
sieve and o to 15% passing 100 sieve.
D.
E.
F.
Divider Strips: Where required provide divider strips complying with ASTM
A167-82, size and finish as approved by the Engineer.
G.
2.03
LATEX GROUT
A.
B.
Latex Additive: styrene butadene based latex liquid specifically designed for
this purpose. The use of polyvinyl acetate, natural rubber or resin latex
emulsions shall not be permitted. Additive shall be latex liquid based on
Laticrete 3701 as manufactured by Laticrete International Incorporated or
equal approved by the Engineer.
C.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-6
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
D.
Sand: Clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay soluble salts
and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-tocoarse within the following limits: 100% passing 8 sieve, 90% to 100%
passing 16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing 30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing 50
sieve and 0 to 15% passing 100 sieve.
E.
F.
3.01
A.
B.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent all Stone work from chipping,
cracking, or other damage, during the unloading and storage on the site.
Damaged Stone work will not be allowed to be installed, and should any
damage be found in erected work, such work shall be removed immediately
and replaced with new work at no additional expense to the Employer.
Stone work shall be stored at the building site on planking set entirely clear of
the ground and shall be protected by proper means from damage to arises
and from contact with anything which would result in the accumulation of dirt,
dust, soot, mud, grease or any other staining, discolouring or disfiguring
elements. During extended period of storage, cover the cut Stone with
tarpaulins, non-staining building paper or boards.
C.
D.
E.
3.02
REQUIREMENTS
A.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-7
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
C.
All materials (Stone, Marble & Granite) shall conform to the requirements of
applicable specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials.
D.
Work shall be commenced only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers and
bucks, which are to be in or behind the Stone work are installed. All surfaces
shall be dry and clean before setting beds are applied.
E.
Note: The Stone setter shall install all work using lighting conditions that will
represent the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. These
requirements will be insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out
Stone tiles.
F.
The Stone setter shall cooperate fully with other trades to do all cutting,
drilling, and fitting to accommodate work of others.
3.03
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work.
Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions
has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or
waived.
B.
Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute
acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that
time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work, and any defects
occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the
Employer.
3.04
A.
B.
Setting Bed for Floor: shall be composed of one part Portland Cement, six
parts damp sand by volume with waterproofed compound, mixed in
accordance with manufacturers specifications. The setting bed for floor shall
be applied with reinforcing mesh over entire area. When mixed with water the
mortar mix shall be of such consistency of workability as to promote
maximum density, determined by stroking the mortar surface with a trowel.
When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a
smoothed, slickened appearance, screed and tamp setting bed firmly. Setting
beds shall be in thickness as shown on the Drawings.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-8
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
While the setting bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows.
Setting: The setting bed shall be applied and rodded to a true and even
surface. Tamp tile in place with mallet until firmly bedded then removed.
Trowel or brush a thin layer, (.1mm) to (2mm) in thickness, of neat white
Portland cement paste over the back of tile. A thin layer or dry Portland
Cement, (.1mm) to (2mm) thick may be applied over the setting bed and
worked lightly with a trowel. These areas (setting bed and cement paste) shall
be limited to what can be covered with tile before the mortar sets. Tile shall be
pressed back firmly into the bed tamping with wood blocks to obtain smooth
surface. All tile shall be aligned properly with straight hairline joints. All
edges of marble tile shall be uttered with neat non-staining white cement
before closing joints. Wipe off excess immediately with sponge and clear
water. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after placing tile.
Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer to
Drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout
to receive sealant. Note: Threshold shall be set in the same manner as Stone
tile with ends keyed into jamb.
Pattern: Floor shall be applied in pattern in accordance with Drawings
including subsequent modification to the Shop Drawings.
1.
Mortar Mixes
i.
ii. Mortar for Setting Stone: One part white Portland cement, one part
hydrated lime, three parts sand. Provide waterproof additive for wet
areas and exterior Stone. Prepare mortar with a shrinkage reducing
accelerator diluted with water in the ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
iii. Pointing Mortar: One part white Portland cement, two parts sand, and
mineral coloring admixture as required to match stone. Mixed as dry
as can be worked. Provide waterproof admixture for exterior and wet
area pointing
C.
Stone Counters Provide Stone counters of the size and profile shown all as
per shop drawings. Provide cutouts as required. Accurately cut, dress,
drill, laminate, fit and finish Stone to shape and dimensions shown. Make
exposed plane surfaces true and in line. Cut all joints and edges square
and at right angles to face unless otherwise shown. Cut and drill stone in
the shop as required for supports, anchors, ties and other inserts.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-9
(-)
_______________________________________________________________________________________
3.05
A.
Cleaning: After Stone has thoroughly set, sponge, and wash thoroughly and
diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to
damage marble or adjacent materials. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners.
Type of cleaner shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application.
Finally, clean all tile using soft, dry cloths.
B.
Protect work after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other
approved coverage until acceptance of the building. The Contractor shall
replace torn or worn papers after the tile setter has completed his work.
___________________________________________________________________________________
STONE FLOORING
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/09600-10
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09632
GRANITE TILES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Scope of Work: Stone Work shall include Marble, Stone and Granite flooring,
skirting, counter, steps (treads & riser), topping and non-mechanical fix
cladding etc. all in accordance with the Drawings and Bills of Quantities.
B.
C.
The principal work of this Section includes, but may not be limited to, the
following:
1.
Stone Flooring
2.
Stone Skirting
3.
Non-Mechanical Fix Stone Cladding
4.
Stone to Staircases
5.
Stone for Counters
6.
Mortar Materials for Setting Stone.
1.02
A.
B.
1.03
2.
3.
ASTM C97
4.
ASTM C99
5.
ASTM C119
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-1
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
7.
ASTM A153-82
8.
ASTM A167-82
9.
ASTM C176
A480M-83A
14. ASTMC503-79
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator: A firm with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the
fabrication of Stone-work units of similar sizes, shapes and finishes to the
units required for this Project and which has ample production facilities to
produce, furnish and supply the units as required for installation without
delay to the work.
B. Erector: A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience in the successful
erection of Stone work units of similar sizes and shapes and of similar
quantities to the units required for this project.
C. The work in this Section shall be executed by an approved specialist SubContractor.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of Stone work showing in detail
the layout, jointing, anchors and dowels, dimensions, sizes and locations
of cut-outs, adjoining work etc. Each piece on the shop drawings shall
correspond to the identification number on the back of each Stone.
Special attention shall be given over the curved/circular areas of Stone
floor & clad. In such areas smaller sizes stone shall be required to match
the curvature. Coordinate all components which are specified elsewhere
(flashing, insulation, sealant) which comprise the system into this
submittal. Coordinate shop drawings with all related trades.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-2
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
TESTING
A. Stone Testing Program: Initial testing of specified Stone should be
performed prior to all other testing programs.
1. Provide samples of sizes and shapes of Stone as required for the
following tests:
Physical Property
a. Compressive Strength
b. Modules of Rupture
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
c. Flexure Bending
Tested Dry
Tested Wet
d. Density
e. Absorption (% by weight)
Test Method
ASTM C1170
ASTM C99
No. of Tests
2
4
4
ASTM C880
ASTM C97
ASTM C97
4
4
2
2
_______________________________________________________
2. Above samples shall be taken at random locations from areas, which
will be quarried for the Project. Do not take all the samples from a
single block. Identify and transmit a record of the samples and quarry
locations from which they were taken.
3. Based on the properties of Stone as determined by the above test
program, the Engineer may revise the design safety factor as
specified.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-3
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.07
SAMPLES
A.
Submit in suitable containers samples of all grout, cement, sealant, and other
materials specified herein to the Engineer for approval.
B.
C.
The samples submitted shall show range in quality, colour and finish that will
occur in the material used on the job. Where there is little variation in
character an average single sample in lieu of duplicate may be submitted.
The approved samples shall become the standard for selection and finish of
the materials furnished under this Contract. All subsequent work shall comply
with approved samples.
1.08
VISUAL MOCK-UPS
Following approval of sample slabs construct mock up as follows:
Provide mock-up for Stone work as required by the Engineer.
1.09
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Carefully pack and load Stone for shipment and take necessary precautions
against damage in transit. Deliver Stone to project site using protection and
handling equipment, which will ensure that there will be no leakage, chipping,
soiling, staining, discoloration, warpage, or other damage. Store above grade
on wood dunnage or other suitable surfaces using polyethylene film to
separate marble from wood or other supporting or protecting members.
Protect from weather, soiling, and damage of every kind.
B.
C.
Any cost arising from breakage of Stone during shipment, handling and
installation shall be borne by the Contractor.
1.10
WARRANTIES.
A.
B.
Manufacturers shall provide their warranties for work under this Section.
However, such warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities, which manufacturers and Contractor may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contract Documents.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-4
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
STONE WORK
A.
B.
2.02
A.
Cement: used for conventional setting beds shall be standard brand Portland
Cement, conforming to current ASTM C-150, Type II. Cement used where
exposed for joints shall be non-staining, conforming to ASTM C-91. Colour to
be selected by the Engineer.
B.
Cement Colouring: Cement used for grouting exposed joints shall be mixed
with approved non-fading, acid resistant pigmented colour as approved by the
Engineer.
C.
Sand: used in cement beds shall be clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free
from silt, loam, clay, soluble salts and/or vegetable matter, conforming to
ASTM C-144 and graded fine to coarse within the following limits: 100%
passing 16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing 30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing 50
sieve and 0 to 15% passing 100 sieve.
D.
E.
F.
Divider Strips: Where required provide divider strips complying with ASTM
A167-82, size and finish as approved by the Engineer.
G.
Non-slip Inserts: Provide non-slip insert for treads, finish as approved by the
Engineer.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-5
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.03
LATEX GROUT
A.
B.
Latex Additive: Styrene butadene based latex liquid specifically designed for
this purpose. The use of polyvinyl acetate, natural rubber or resin latex
emulsions shall not be permitted. Additive shall be latex liquid .
C.
D.
Sand: Clean, sharp, durable bank sand, free from silt, loam, clay soluble salts
and/or vegetable matter, conforming to ASTM C-144 and graded fine-tocoarse within the following limits: 100% passing 8 sieve, 90% to 100%
passing 16 sieve, 60% to 90% passing 30 sieve, 25% to 55% passing 50
sieve and 0 to 15% passing 100 sieve.
E.
F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
B.
Take all necessary precautions to prevent all Stone work from chipping,
cracking, or other damage, during the unloading and storage on the site.
Damaged Stone work will not be allowed to be installed, and should any
damage be found in erected work, such work shall be removed immediately
and replaced with new work at no additional expense to the Employer.
C.
Stone work shall be stored at the building site on planking set entirely clear of
the ground and shall be protected by proper means from damage to arise and
from contact with anything which would result in the accumulation of dirt, dust,
soot, mud, grease or any other staining, discoloring or disfiguring elements.
During extended period of storage, cover the cut Stone with tarpaulins, nonstaining building paper or boards.
D.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-6
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
E.
3.02
REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
All materials (stone, marble & granite) shall conform to the requirements of
applicable specifications of the American Society for Testing Materials.
D.
Work shall be commenced only after grounds, anchors, plugs, hangers and
bucks, which are to be in or behind the stone work are installed. All surfaces
shall be dry and clean before setting beds are applied.
Note: The stone setter shall install all work using lighting conditions that will
represent the proposed lighting required in the areas involved. These
requirements will be insisted upon in order to achieve uniformity in laying out
stone tiles.
The stone setter shall cooperate fully with other trades to do all cutting,
drilling, and fitting to accommodate work of others.
3.03
PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A.
Thoroughly examine all surfaces to receive work of this Section, and notify
Engineer in writing of all conditions, which would adversely affect this work.
Do not commence work in any area where such notice of adverse conditions
has been sent to the Engineer, until corrective work has been completed or
waived.
B.
Starting of work in any area without issuance of such notice should constitute
acceptance of conditions in the area by this applicator who shall from that
time be responsible for the satisfactory results of his work, and any defects
occurring thereafter shall be corrected without additional charge to the
Employer.
3.04
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-7
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
B.
Setting Bed for Floor: Shall be composed of one part Portland Cement, six
parts damp sand by volume with waterproofed compound, mixed in
accordance with manufacturers specifications. The setting bed for floor shall
be applied with reinforcing mesh over entire area. When mixed with water the
mortar mix shall be of such consistency of workability as to promote
maximum density, determined by stroking the mortar surface with a trowel.
When of correct consistency, the trowelled surface readily assumes a
smoothed, slackened appearance, screed and tamp setting bed firmly.
Setting beds shall be in thickness as shown on the drawings. While the
setting bed is still fresh but stiff enough to set tile, set tile as follows.
Setting: The setting bed shall be applied and rodded to a true and even
surface. Tamp tile in place with mallet until firmly bedded then removed.
Trowel or brush a thin layer, (.1mm) to (2mm) in thickness, of neat white
Portland cement paste over the back of tile. A thin layer or dry Portland
Cement, (.1mm) to (2mm) thick may be applied over the setting bed and
worked lightly with a trowel. These areas (setting bed and cement paste) shall
be limited to what can be covered with tile before the mortar sets. Tile shall be
pressed back firmly into the bed tamping with wood blocks to obtain smooth
surface. All tile shall be aligned properly with straight hairline joints. All
edges of marble tile shall be uttered with neat non-staining white cement
before closing joints. Wipe off excess immediately with sponge and clear
water. Tamping shall be completed within one hour after placing tile.
Adjusting work out of line shall be done within the one-hour period. Refer to
Drawings for location of expansion joints. All such joints shall be clear of grout
to receive sealant.
Note: Threshold shall be set in the same manner as stone tile with ends
keyed into jamb.
Pattern: Floor shall be applied in pattern in accordance with drawings
including subsequent modification to the Shop Drawings
C.
2.
3.
The quality of field cutting shall be the same as for shop cutting.
4.
Mortar Mixes
a. Mix mortars in small batches, to a stiff plastic mass, until thoroughly
homogeneous mortar achieved. Do not use mortar until it has set for
one hour. Mortar may be used only up to one hour after mixing.
b. Mortar for Setting Stone: One part white Portland cement, one part
hydrated lime, three parts sand. Provide waterproof additive for wet
areas and exterior Stone. Prepare mortar with a shrinkage reducing
accelerator diluted with water in the ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-8
GRANITE TILES
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
c. Pointing Mortar: One part white Portland cement, two parts sand, and
mineral coloring admixture as required to match stone. Mixed as dry
as can be worked. Provide waterproof admixture for exterior and wet
area pointing
D.
Stone Counters: Provide stone counters of the size and profile shown all as
per shop drawings. Provide cutouts as required. Accurately cut, dress, drill,
laminate, fit and finish stone to shape and dimensions shown. Make exposed
plane surfaces true and in line. Cut all joints and edges square and at right
angles to face unless otherwise shown. Cut and drill stone in the shop as
required for supports, anchors, ties and other inserts.
3.05
A.
Cleaning: After stone has thoroughly set, sponge, and wash thoroughly and
diagonally across joints. Remove all surface cement and take care not to
damage marble or adjacent materials. Do not use acid or abrasive cleaners.
Type of cleaner shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application.
Finally, clean all tile using soft, dry cloths.
B.
Protect work after cleaning with non-staining heavy Kraft paper or other
approved coverage until acceptance of the building. The Contractor shall
replace torn or worn papers after the tile setter has completed his work.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09632-9
GRANITE TILES
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09650
VINYL FLOORING
PART-1 GENERAL
1.01
A.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work included in this Section comprises furnishing all plant, labour, equipment,
appliances, and Tile/Roll Flooring. materials and performing all operation in
connection with Vinyl .
1. Resilient (PVC/Vinyl) - Composition Tile/Roll flooring.
2. Vinyl Base/skirting.
3. Edging Strips
4. Insets.
1.02
A.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.04
A.
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer: Company specializing with manufacture of products specified
with minimum (ten)10 years documented experience.
1.05
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop drawings: Provide shop drawings for installation and erection of all
parts of the work. Provide plans, elevations and details where vinyl tiles
and sheet terminate and meeting of floor and walls.
B.
1.06
A.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-1
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.07
A.
1.08
PRODUCT LITERATURE
Product Data: For each product or material used, submit manufacturer's
product data, including installation instructions, use, limitations and
recommendations. Provide certifications stating that materials comply with
requirements. Submit maintenance data with recommended cleaning and
stain removal methods, cleaning materials.
A.
B.
C.
Store
and
handle
recommendations.
in
D.
Sequence deliveries to
ordination of the work.
avoid
strict
compliance
project
delays
with
and
to
instructions
permit
proper
and
co-
1.09
CO-ORDINATION
A.
Completely co-ordinate the work specified in this Section with all other
work. Verify field dimensions and condition of work, which adjoins material
of this section, and notify the Engineer of deviations from the Contract
Documents before proceeding with the work specified in this section.
B.
Commence work only after all electrical and mechanical work, which are to
be in or behind flooring work are installed.
1.10
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Method of installation of PVC/Vinyl tile shall be in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-2
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Edging strips: Leveled edging strips composed of vinyl 25mm wide by 900mm long
by 3.2mm thick (or same thickness of floor vinyl).
D.
Insets: Insets shall be of design, location and colour as indicated on the drawings
and as approved by the Engineer
E.
F.
Performance
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Data:
The
vinyl
tile,
base
shall
meet
the
following
4.
Static generation: less than 100 volts with conductive footwear per
AATCC-134 at 20% relative humidity.
5.
Fire resistance:
(a) Critical radiant flux (ASTM E-648 or NFFA253) - 1.03W/cm2 (Class
interior floor finish, NFPA life safely code 101)
(b) Flame spread (ASTM E-84 or NFPA 255) - less than 450.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-3
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
6.
% Gauge loss
2,500
5,000
7,500
10,000
0.40
0.80
1.20
1.60
to
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01
A.
Prior to material installation verify the sub-floor. This would include insuring
that the sub-floors are structurally sound and rigid (inflexible), dry, clean,
smooth and free from all dust, dirt, adhesive, loose or scaly paint, wax, oil,
grease etc.
B.
3.02
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
B.
Grind down all ridges and other irregularities. Fill all cracks, holes, and
depression with latex cement underlayment as recommended by the flooring
manufacturer.
C.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-4
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
MOISTURE TEST
A.
Determine the suitability of the Terrazzo or Screed sub floor for receiving the resilient
flooring with regard to the moisture content by a bond test as recommended by the
flooring manufacturer.
3.04
A.
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
3.07
CLEANING
A.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-5
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.08
PROTECTION
A.
From the time of laying until acceptance, flooring shall be protected from
damage. Flooring which becomes damaged, loose, broken, or curled shall
be removed and replaced.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09650-6
VINYL FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.02
STANDARDS
A.
1.03
QUALIFICATION
A.
Manufacturer: A firm (carpet mill) with not less than 5 years of production
experience with carpet similar to types specified in this Section and whose
published product literature clearly indicates general compliance of products
with requirements of this Section.
B.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of each type, colour, and pattern of carpet required
to the Engineer. Submit 150 mm long samples of carpet edge strip. Submit
samples of carpet tile in standard tile sizes. Samples of sheet carpet shall be
100cm x 100cm. Submit samples as many as required for Engineers choice
of colour, texture etc.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet layout, seam locations
and edge strip locations to the Engineer. Indicate direction of pattern and lay
of pile. Show details of cutouts.
E.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-1
CARPET
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.05
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
B.
1.06
EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide 2% extra stock of carpet tile and carpet of each type and colour and
pattern. Store where directed by the Engineer, completely identified by type
carpet code and dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Pile Yarn: Provide yarn spun in the manner recommended by the yarn
manufacturer and the carpet manufacturer, in number of piles and denier
indicated or required, to achieve the pile yard weight, texture and pattern
indicated.
D.
Dye: Use dyes and dyeing methods recognized by the industry as successful
for the type of fiber being dyed and to achieve the required colours and fade
resistance. Achieve the fade resistance established by the Association of
Textile Chemists and Colourists for carpet when tested on the Atlas
Fadeometer for 40 hours.
E.
Carpet Cushion: Provide and install one of the following in areas where sheet
carpet is installed:
1.
2.
3.
4.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-2
CARPET
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
F.
G.
Tape: Woven fabric impregnated with plastic and coated with adhesive having
high-tack adhesion forming a secure bond. Provide water-resisting plasticcoated tape which will unwind without adhesive transfer.
H.
2.02
CARPET CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
2.03
SCHEDULE
Refer to Drawings for Carpet locations.
A.
Carpet Tiles
1.
Manufacturer
a.
b.
c.
b.
Product:
P/8503 Dalesman.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-3
CARPET
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
c.
d.
Face Yarn:
e.
f.
g.
Gauge:
h.
Tufts:
i.
j.
Backing:
k.
l.
m.
Color:
n.
Warranty:
10 year commercial.
Everwher(R) or equal.
Sheet/Roll Carpet
1.
Manufacturer
a.
b.
c.
Manufacturer:
Brintons Ltd.
b.
Product:
Broadloop
c.
Construction:
d.
Face Yarn:
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-4
CARPET
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
e.
Rows:
8/in. (31.5/dm)
f.
Pitch:
g.
Width:
66 " (2.0m)
h.
Color:
i.
Static Control:
j.
Total Thickness:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PREPARATION
A.
B.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
Sheet Stock
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-5
CARPET
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
6.
B.
Tackless Installation
a.
b.
c.
d.
Carpet Tile
1.
Carpet tile with release adhesive shall be laid in strict accordance with
the manufacturers latest detailed written installation instructions,
copies of which shall be on the job site at all times.
2.
Each tile shall be laid in a random ashlar pattern identified on the shop
drawings, which will alternate the direction of the pile lay so that it is
not in continuous direction in any one case.
3.
3.03
A.
B.
Protect carpet from damage and soiling. Use non-staining cover material for
protection. Tape joints in protective covering.
END OF SECTION
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09680-6
CARPET
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART - 1 GENERAL
1.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
1.02
DESCRIPTION
A.
The Contractor shall examine other Sections of the Specifications for the
various other trades and shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all such terms
and surfaces to be included in this work, which are not included in other
Sections.
B.
The term paint, as used herein, includes paints, enamels, stains, varnishes,
lacquers, sealers, fillers, and other types of coatings whether used as primers,
intermediate or finish coats.
1.03
A.
Shop Primed Items: Certain items of work are specified under other Sections
To be shop primed with finish painting specified in this Section.
B.
Shop Primed Items: Certain items of work are specified under Sections to be
shop finished and do not require finish painting in the filed.
C.
D.
E.
Identification stenciling required for utility lines and ducts, specified under
MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL Section.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-1
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
1.04
REFERENCES/STANDARDS
1.
2.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
1.06
MOCKUP
A.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Where manufacture makes more than one grade of any material specified, this
applicator shall use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material
is mentioned by trade name in these specifications.
B.
Include on labels of all containers the manufacturers name, the product name
and number, the color and the batch number.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-2
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
1.08
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Paint shall not be applied in rain, fog, or mist, or when the air is dust laden, or
when the relative humidity exceeds 85%. Paints, other than water-thinned
coatings, shall be applied only to surfaces that are completely free of surfaces
moisture as determined by sight, touch, and moisture meter, as specified.
B.
Paint shall not be applied when temperature of the surfaces to be painted and
the surrounding atmosphere is below 10 Deg. C. for water-thinned coatings and
below 7 Deg.C. for other coatings. Maintain temperatures within the building at
a minimum of 16 Deg.C. during painting and drying periods.
C.
D.
1.09
A.
All materials shall be stored in designated spaces in a manner, which meets the
requirements of applicable code and fire regulations. When not in use, such
spaces
shall be kept locked and in accessible to those not employed
under this Section. Each space shall be provided with a fire extinguisher of
carbon dioxide.
Dry Chemical type bearing the label of the National Board of Fire Underwriters
and tag of recent inspection
B.
All materials shall be brought to the site and stored in the mixing room in
manufacturers original sealed containers, bearing the manufacturers standard
label, indicating type and color. Materials shall be delivered in sufficient
quantities in advance of the time needed in order that work will not be
delayed in any way.
C.
Deliver work under this Section to site in ample time to avoid delay in job
progress and at such items as to permit proper coordination of the various
parts.
1.10
PROTECTION
A.
Place paint or solvent soaked rags, waste, or other materials, which might
constitute a fire hazard in metal containers and remove from premises at the
close of each days work. Take every precaution to avoid damage by fire.
B.
Protect the work of all other trades against damage the progress of the painting
and finishing work. Repair any damage done.
C.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-3
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
PART - 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
All materials used into this work shall be as hereinafter specified. No claims as
to the suitability of any material specified, or the Contractors inability to
produce first class work with these materials will be considered.
B.
Provide only absolutely pure linseed oil, turpentine, shellac, and other like
materials that are of the highest quality with identifying labels intact and seals
unbroken. Use no thinners other than those specified by the manufacturer.
C.
Use only primers and undercoats that are suitable for each surface to be
covered and
that are compatible with the finish coat required.
D.
Use products of the same manufacturer for succeeding coats. Where shop
primed materials are to be finish painted and/or prime coat materials are by a
different manufacture than the finish coat materials, confirm compatibility of the
primers with the manufacturer of the finish coat paints.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Knotting:
Shall comply with B.S. 1336.
B.
Stopping:
Stopping for:
1. Plaster work shall be plaster-based filler.
2. Concrete rendering or brickwork shall be similar material to the
background and shall be finished with a similar texture.
3. Internal woodwork, plywood, shall be putty complying with B.S. 544 and
shall be tinted to match the color of the undercoat.
4. External woodwork shall be white lead paste and shall be tinted to match
the color of the undercoat.
5. Clear finished woodwork shall be a stopping tinted to match the
surrounding woodwork.
C.
Linseed Oil:
1. Refined linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 242.
2. Raw linseed oil shall comply with B.S. 243.
3. Boiled linseed oil shall comply with BS 259.
D.
Turpentine:
Turpentine shall comply with B.S. 244 and B.S. 290.
E.
White Spirit:
White spirit shall comply with B.S. 245.
F.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-4
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
2.
For alkaline surfaces shall be special primers obtained from the maker
of undercoat and finishing coats.
3. For bituminous surfaces to be finished with oil paint: special primer
recommended by the maker of undercoat and finishing coats.
4. For iron and steelwork: Red oxide priming paint complying with B.S.
2524.
5. For external galvanized steelwork: Apply a wash coat for the pretreatment of new galvanized surfaces.
6. For internal wood work: an approved leadless white or light gray primary
paint, compatible with undercoat and finishing coats and obtained from
the same maker.
7. For external woodwork: a ready mixed aluminium primary paint to
comply with B.S. 4756.
8. For hardwood: a special ready mixed primer obtained from the maker of
the undercoat and finished coats.
9. For external block or concrete surface use Paint as specified and shown
in the drawings.
10. For external white textured paint: use an alkali resistant under coat.
G.
Emulsion Paint:
Emulsion paint shall be of the polyvinyl acetate type.
H.
Oil Paints:
Hard gloss and flat oil paints and their respective undercoats shall be from
approved manufacturers.
I.
J.
Teak Oil:
Teak oil shall be of an approved brand and applied in accordance with
manufacturers instructions.
K.
Varnish:
Varnish for woodwork shall be of an approved brand.
2.03
A.
Expanded metal lathe over whole are of plaster and painting surfaces
including corner/stop beads as per requirements.
Grouting of surfaces including special additives.
Apply sand cement plaster (1:3) as per required thickness, smooth
surface applying special additives.
Provide all required joints (Expansion and Architectural joints).
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-5
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
5.
6.
Apply texture paint to the required thickness as per approved color and
texture.
Provide two (2) coats of protection layer.
B.
Texture Paint:
Exterior quality: 5 mm thick texture paint finish including protection layer may
be used if it is mentioned in the drawings and BOQ. In case the abovementioned external quality pant is used, the Contractor shall submit the
manufacturers specifications and data including color schedule for Engineers
review and approval.
2.04
COMPATIBILITY OF COATINGS
A.
It is essential that paints applied in the shop and in the field be mutually
compatible. Shop drawings for fabricated items will indicate manufacturer
and type of shop coat applied.
B.
This applicator shall determine that the materials specified in the Painting
Schedule are compatible with shop coats to which these materials are to be
applied and he shall bring to the Engineers attention any condition, which may
require a change in the specifications before proceeding with his work. Failure
to do so shall be construed as acceptance of the paints specified and this
applicator shall correct at his own expense, any defects in his work resulting
from the use of such materials.
No claim by this applicator concerning the unsuitability of any material
specified, his ability to produce first class work with same will be entertainment
after Contract is signed.
C.
2.05
COLORS
A.
The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colors for each area and surface. All
colors shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
Colors shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew proof, sun proof, finely
ground in approved medium. Colors used on concrete, wallboard surfaces (as
applicable) shall be lime proof. All materials shall be subject to the Engineers
approval.
PART - 3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
Examine the substrata and adjoining construction, and the conditions under
which the work is to be installed. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the
work have been corrected.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-6
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
3.02
GENERAL
A.
Inspect all surfaces about their suitability to receive a finish. In the event that
imperfections due to materials or workmanship appear on any surfaces after
the application of paint or coating, the cost of any correction shall be borne by
the Contractor.
B.
Remove hardware, switch-plates, trim for mechanical work, lighting fixtures and
similar items placed prior to painting, set aside and re-fix on completion of
painting work. Protect items where not practicable to remove and upon
completion of painting work remove protection.
C.
Clean all surfaces to be painted as required to remove dust and dirt. Sand as
necessary to properly prepare surfaces to receive paint or natural finish.
D.
E.
Do not apply final coats until after other trades whose operations would be
detrimental to finish painting have finished with their work in the area to be
painted and the areas have been released for painting.
F.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-7
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
4. Woodwork to be painted:
Before fixing woodwork, all surfaces, which will be visible after fixing, shall
be rubbed down and all knots and resin pockets shall be coated with
knotting.
After priming and fixing, all nail holes and other imperfections shall be
stopped and the whole surfaces shall be rubbed down and all dust
brushed off.
5. Wood work to receive a clear finish:
All holes and other imperfections in surfaces to receive a clear finish shall
be stopped and the whole surfaces shall be rubbed down and all dust
brushed off.
6. Waterproof Coatings:
Surfaces of concrete shall be smooth and clean of dust and dirt before
receiving the primers of the waterproof coating.
All cracks, tie bolt holes, fins, etc. shall be filled, ground as per
instructions of the manufacturer of waterproof coating.
The waterproof coating shall be applied strictly as per manufactures
recommendations and instructions.
7. Ferrous Metals
Clean and prime ferrous metal surfaces, which have not been shop
primed, before the surface is damaged by weather or other exposure.
After erection is completed touch up heads of bolts, welded surfaces,
which are unpainted, and surfaces or areas where the primer has been
abraded or otherwise damaged.
Prior to application of any field coats on ferrous metal surfaces, remove
oil, grease, welding flux residues and other contaminants harmful to
painting in accordance with the applicable requirements of SSPC-SP 1-63
Solvent Cleaning. After solvent cleaning prepare any bare metal
surfaces by removing all stratified rust (rust scale), all loose mill scale, all
loose or non-adherent rust and detrimental welding deposits by methods
specified in SSPC-SP 3-63 Power Tool cleaning. Prepare any corroded
or abraded surfaces of Architectural Steel or other shop-coated metal by
sanding to bare metal.
8. Galvanized Metals
Clean galvanized metal surfaces of all oil, grease and other
contaminants in accordance with the applicable requirements of SSPCSP1-63 Solvent Cleaning, and pre-treat in accordance with SSPC-PT
2-64 Cold Phosphate Treatment, prime as follows:
Prime with a Zinc Dust, Zinc Oxide, Alkyd Paint.
Prior to application of subsequent coats, thoroughly clean all surfaces to
ensure the removal of any grease, soil, dust, or foreign matter. Take
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-8
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
Shop-Primed
st
Galvanized
a.
b.
c.
Stain Finish
a. 1st Coat: Stain Penetrating Wood Preservative
b.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-9
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
2.
3.
Flat Finish
a. 1st Coat: Wood Primer
b. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Latex
c. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Latex
3.04
A.
B.
Ferrous Metal
1.
Shop-Primed
st
a. 1 Coat: Enamel Undercoater
b.
2.
C.
Galvanized
a. 1st Coat: Zinc Dust Primer
b.
c.
2.
D.
Enamel Finish
a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer
b.
c.
Flat Finish
a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer
b.
c.
Enamel Finish
a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer
b.
c.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-10
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
2.
E.
F.
3.05
A.
Flat Finish
a. 1st Coat: Latex Primer
b.
c.
2.
3.
Piping and Mechanical Equipment: paint piping, pipe hangers and supports,
heat exchangers, tanks, ductwork, insulation, motors, electrical conduits,
switchgear and other mechanical and electrical equipment except equipment
which is non-ferrous metal, plated, finished by manufacturers, permanently
concealed or noted to be painted under other Sections. Properly clean,
prepare and finish as specified. Paint materials shall be heat-resisting type
when applied to heating lines and equipment.
1.
2.
3.
PAINT APPLICATION
General:
1. All materials shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturers
instructions and to the approval of the Engineer. Recommended dry film
thickness (dft) is 75-125 microns/coat or as specified by the
manufacturer.
The contents of all cans and containers must be properly and thoroughly
studied before and during use and stirred as and when necessary.
2. Paint shall be applied by a brush, roller, or spray in accordance with the
manufactures instructions. All materials, when brushed, shall be evenly
flowed on with brushes best suited for the type of material being applied.
When using a roller, the covers shall be carpet, velvet back, or high pile
sheep wool best suited for material and texture selected by the Engineer.
Sprayed paint shall be uniformly applied with suitable equipment. Provide
for periodic supervision by representatives of paint manufacturers.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-11
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
3. Spread all materials evenly and smoothly without runs, sags, or other
defects. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shape
and clean, without overlapping. Allow sufficient time between coats to
ensure proper drying. Sand between coats with fine glass-paper, or rub
surfaces with pumice stone where required in accordance with
manufactures directions to produce an even, smooth finish.
4. Exposed surfaces shall mean all areas visible when all permanent or
built-in fixates, grilles, mechanical and electrical equipment housings,
ducts, and conduits are in place in all areas specified or scheduled to be
painted.
5. Access panels and similar items in painted areas shall be painted to
match the areas in which they occur unless otherwise as specified in the
schedules.
6. Paint the back side of access panels, removable or hinged covers. Do not
paint nameplates on equipment.
7. Wherever steel or other metal parts are shown to be built into and
concealed by masonry construction the Contractor shall paint all such
work same as herein specified for exposed parts. Coordinate the work
with all related trades, so that all finish painting of concealed parts is
completed before such work commences. Do not finish paint-exposed
parts until after completion of works.
B.
C.
Color of undercoats:
Each succeeding coat of priming and undercoats shall be sufficiently different
in color as to be readily distinguishable.
D.
Unsuitable conditions:
No painting shall be applied to surfaces affected by wet, damp, or other
unsuitable conditions.
External painting work shall not be carried out during inclement weather.
3.06
PROTECTION
A.
B.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-12
PAINTING
( )
________________________________________________________________________________
3.07
CLEANLINESS
A.
All brushes tools, etc shall be kept in a clean condition. Painting shall not be
carried out in the vicinity of other operations, which might raise dust. Contractor
shall not throw any liquids; slop washings etc. into gullies, manholes, sinks,
basins, W.Cs or any other sanitary fittings. Suitable receptacles shall be
provided by the Contractor to receive such liquids and slop washings. All
inflammable residues shall be removed from the site.
3.08
CLEAN UP
A.
____________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/09900-13
PAINTING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10200
LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
C.
The Drawings show the extent of Aluminium Louvers work, hereby defined
to include (but not necessarily limited to) the following components:
1.
2.
Aluminium Frame.
3.
4.
Sealant, joint fillers and gaskets in conjunction with the above items.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.
3.
ANSI/AAMA 302.9.
4.
5.
B.
Obtain louvers / grilles from a single source where alike in one or more
respects with regard to type, design and factory applied colour finish.
C.
III-2/10200-1
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop drawings of all components for review
by the Engineer. Include full size sections of all typical members,
dimensioned elevations, anchors, and other accessories required.
C.
Samples
1.
2.
1.04
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
Approved Manufacturers
1.
Universal Molding Co.
10807 Stanford Avenue
P.O.Box 292 , Lynwood
California 90262
2.
3.
4.
III-2/10200-2
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
B.
C.
Stainless Steel Sheets and Plates: Sizes and minimum gauge as required to
fulfill performance requirements. Suitable alloy and proper temper for forming
and fabricating with adequate structural characteristics and suitable for
finishing as required.
D.
Steel Angles, Plates, Bars, Rods and Other Steel Accessories Required to
Join or Reinforce Assembly of Aluminium Components: ASTM A36 and
ASTM A283, galvanized or, if galvanizing is not compatible with alloy or
component parts, shop painted with zinc chromate primer after cutting to size.
E.
F.
Fasteners: Stainless steel type 300 series, selected to prevent galvanic action
with the components fastened. Where exposed in finished surfaces, use ovalhead countersunk Phillips heads with colour to match adjacent surfaces.
G.
H.
Hardware
1.
2.
3.
III-2/10200-3
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.03
LOUVERS / GRILLES
A.
2.
2.04
ALUMINIUM FINISHES
A.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Water Resistance: (ISO/R 1621-1971) to withstand 100 hours in deionized (but not aerated) water at 40 Deg. C.
9.
III-2/10200-4
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
C.
2.
2.05
FABRICATION
A.
B.
C.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing including separation between blades and
frames at head and sill to produce uniform appearance.
D.
E.
F.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing indicated but not further apart
than recommended by manufacturer. At horizontal joints between louver units
provide horizontal mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are
indicated.
G.
H.
2.06
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Finish Colour Range: During production, maintain large size colour range
samples for use in comparing against production material. Mark and code
extremes of the colour range so that these will not be installed adjacent to
one another in any one unit.
III-2/10200-5
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
CONDITION OF SURFACES
A.
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Coordinate metal louvers / grilles with the work of other trade and provide
items to be placed during the installation of other work. Check the location of
such items and verify that they have been set accurately in relation to the final
location of louvers.
C.
D.
2.
E.
Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the
manufacturer or fabricator and in accordance with his recommendations. Do
not cut through reinforcing members. Restore finish completely to protect
material and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and
replace members where cutting and trimming have impaired strength or
appearance.
F.
G.
Set units level, plumb and true to line, with uniform joints. Support on metal
shims and secure in place by bolting to clip angles and similar supports
anchored to supporting structure. Use only the types of equipment, ropes,
wedges, spacers, shims, and other items during erection, which will not stain
or mark the finish of units.
H.
III-2/10200-6
LOUVERS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
I.
J.
Solder and braze only to fill or seal joints (not to form structural joints), and in
accordance with component part manufacturers recommendations. Grind
smooth and restore finish.
K.
Paint clip angles and other ferrous metal parts, which will be concealed, with
zinc chromate paint.
L.
M.
N.
3.03
A.
B.
C.
END OF SECTION
III-2/10200-7
LOUVERS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10270
ACCESS FLOORING
PART 1. GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
A
be
compatible
with
access
floor
pedestal
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Finished floor height of the system above the sub floor shall be as shown on the
shop drawings.
1.04
A.
Submit shop drawings showing complete access floor system including floor
panel layout and all accessories that are a part of the system.
B.
1.05
SAMPLES
A.
Submit for approval one full size floor panel with finished surface and
understructure components for each type of access floor system being
supplied.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10270- 1
ACCESS FLOORING
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit certified laboratory test data for approval, which indicates that the
supplied system complies with the performance indicated herein.
Test Methods:
1.
2.
Test Method for Impact Load: Panel without floor covering shall be
supported on actual understructure. An impact load is applied to the
panel via a one square inch indenter which is struck by a predetermined
load dropped from a height of 36". The panel shall be loaded at its
weakest point. Weakest point to be determined by an independent test
lab.
3.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIAL
A.
B.
Understructure System:
Stringerless - Gravity Held Panel 6"-18" (Finished floor height).
The understructure system to be supplied shall be Stringer less -Gravity Held
Panels.
B1.
Pedestal Assembly:
a)
b)
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10270- 2
ACCESS FLOORING
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
c)
B2.
Pedestal Bases;
Fabricated of a square base with not less than 16 square inches of
bearing area and assembled to a stud or tube, which is designed to
engage the pedestal head assembly; secure to sub-floor in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
B3.
Pedestal Heads:
Fabricated of a head plate with a corresponding stud or tube, which is
designed to engage the pedestal base assembly. The head must, be
the proper type to positively locate the floor panel or to receive a
stringer system. The head shall provide a means to fasten the floor
panel or stringer directly to the head.
C.
D.
Accessories:
1.
2.
Air Flow Panels: Panels shall be all steel welded construction with a 25%
open air perforated top sheet and shall be supplied with an adjustable
damper assembly. Panels shall be capable of supporting a design load of
1250lbs on one square inch anywhere on the panel. Permanent set under
this design load shall not exceed 0.010 inches.
Panels with an adjustable damper assembly and 1250lb design load shall
provide 525 CFM at a static pressure of 0.1" H2O.
Panels without an adjustable damper assembly shall provide 800 CFM at a
static pressure of 0.1" H2O.
3.
4.
Provide ten spare floor panels and ten square feet of understructure
systems for each type used in the project for maintenance stock. Deliver
to project in manufacturer's standard packages clearly marked with the
contents.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10270- 3
ACCESS FLOORING
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
PART - 3. EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Inspection
C.
D.
1.
2.
Do not proceed with installation until sub-floor surfaces are clean, dry,
clear of other trades and ready to receive access flooring.
2.
Installed access floor shall be level within plus or minus 0.060 inches in
10 feet, and plus or minus 0.10 inches over the entire area. Floor to be
rigid and free of rocking panels.
2.
The Contractor is to protect the finished access floor from damage and
misuse.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10270- 4
ACCESS FLOORING
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10400
SIGNAGE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
B.
This Contractor shall become familiar with other sections of the specifications
affecting work of this trade
C.
Furnish all labors, materials, plants, Equipments and appliances and perform
all necessary operations required to execute the work of this section
SECTION INCLUDES;
The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installation
of interior and exterior directional, information signage and road signs.
Main LOGO
1.02
1.03.
1.04.
RELATED ITEMS
A.
B.
Cast-In-Place Concrete
C.
D.
Metal Finishes
E.
Special Coatings
F.
Painting
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
Submit copies of manufacturers latest published literature for materials
specified herein for approval, and obtain approval before materials are
fabricated and delivered to the site.
III-2/10400-1
SIGNAGE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
B.
Samples
Samples of materials specified herein and shall be submitted for approval,
and approval obtained before materials are delivered to the site.
1.05
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Exercise proper care in the handling of work so as not to injure the finished
surfaces, and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it
is in place.
B.
Deliver materials to the job site ready for use. Assemblies shall be identical to
submitted and reviewed shop drawings, samples and certificates.
C.
Store materials under cover in a dry and clean location off the ground.
Remove materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for
installation from the job site and replace with acceptable materials at no
additional cost.
III-2/10400-2
SIGNAGE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2- MATERIALS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
Interior and exterior signs specified herein shall be as manufactured by an approved
manufacturer.
2.02
MATERIALS
Accessories: Manufacturers standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers and
other accessories compatible with material in contact, as required for complete
installations.
2.03.
FABRICATION
Provide interior and exterior signs of design, basic profile and materials
recommended by the Manufacturer.
2.04.
General
The materials used are 0.7mm thick aluminium panels, extruded aluminium
and injection moulded plastics. The paperflex front as well as the frame
members are made of polycarbonate. The remaining components are made
of ABS.
Surfaces shall be painted.
All signs are mounted on wall rails by means of frame members. Use 1 frame
member for 29mm high panels and 2 for all other sizes. Use 1 wall rail for
157mm wide panels and 2 wall rails for all other widths.
B.
Suspended Sign
Plate aluminium, punched and bent, injection moulded polycarbonate frame
members. Extruded aluminium rails, injection moulded ABS end clips and
locking elements.
Surface treatment: Polyester paint.
C.
Wall Sign
Plate aluminium, punched and bent, injection moulded polycarbonate frame
members. Extruded aluminium rails, injection moulded ABS end clips and
locking elements.
Surface treatment: Polyester paint.
III-2/10400-3
SIGNAGE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
D.
E.
F.
Wall Sign
Aluminium plate with welded bolts. Frame members are extruded ABS plastic
strips equipped with frame member clips. Wall rails are bent aluminium.
All visible parts are painted with oven hardened polyester paint.
G.
2.05.
ROAD SIGNS
A.
Aluminium Plates
Plates shall be 3mm thick and smooth at all edges.
B.
III-2/10400-4
SIGNAGE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.06.
MAIN LOGO
A.
B.
III-2/10400-5
SIGNAGE
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01.
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02.
3.03.
3.04.
3.05.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the
coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of
related trades.
C.
B.
B.
C.
D.
END OF SECTION
III-2/10400-6
SIGNAGE
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10536
AWNINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
Includes drawings and general provisions of the Contract; including General and
Particular Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications
1.02
SUMMARY
A.
B.
This section includes Contractor to design, fabricate and install, maintain textile fabric
including supports and fixings as shown on drawings.
RELATED SECTIONS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.03
A.
1.04
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Warranty: Not less than 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
1.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
www.ferrari-architecture.com
Ferari Textiles corp
1510 SW 5 Court
Pompano Beach, FL 33069
USA
Tel: 954 942 3600
Fax:954 942 5555
_______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10536-1
AWNINGS
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Flontex AG
CH 8203
Schaffhausen
Winkelriedstrasse 82
Tel:0041 0714403 487
Fax:0041 0714401 331
3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
As per manufacturers instruction and recommendation.
_______________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10536-2
AWNINGS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10615
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
The work included in this Section are indicated on the drawings and specified
herein, pertains to the fabricating , furnishing and installing of demountable
partitions, their framing and all support systems of glass and solid partition as
indicated on the drawings.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
All sections affecting this section and all sections affected by this section shall
be related sections.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.04
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.05
MOCK-UP
A.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.08
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10615-1
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
1.09
A.
Delivery:
1.
Be responsible for the proper scheduling of delivery and installation of
components all in accordance with the construction schedule in ample
time to avoid delay in job progress and for proper co-ordination.
2.
Deliver materials to protest site in original, unopened packaging
bearing manufacturer name and label intact and legible.
3.
Prepare and package units to ensure no undue stresses are caused in
transportation.
4.
Protect exposed surfaces with a suitable covering before dispatch
from the storage area.
5.
Clearly mark units to indicate their location in the building, marking
must not appear on finished surfaces.
B.
Storage: Store units and profiles in a protected area away from construction
activities and weather influences.
C.
Handling:
1.
Do not remove packaging and protect coverings until instructed by the
installation supervisor.
2.
Protect edges and corners until units are ready for installation.
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
Do not install demountable partitions until all floor works or other such works
are completed and approved.
B.
Coordinate the work of this Section with the respective trades responsible for
installing interfacing work, and ensure that the work performed hereunder is
acceptable to such trades for the installation of their work.
1.11
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall provide warranty for five (5) years for the products and their
installation for warping, cracking, breakage or failure due to deflective
workmanship under this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10615-2
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.
Interwand Eibergen BV
Local agent: CPF Int. Company
Tel.: (965)
25756147 Fax: (965) 25711058
Email : cpf@cpf-int.com
2.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
2.03
COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10615-3
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
I.
J.
Doors: The doorframes can be provided with steel, wooden or glass doors
according to the manufacturer regulations.
Door furniture: Different types can be provided according tio the
manufacturer.
2.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
During the operation of partition/gypsum board work, protect, all wood, metal
glass, flooring and other finished materials against undue soilage and
damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precautions. Repair or
replace any work so damaged and soiled.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10615-4
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
3.04
A.
After the installation of the demountable partitions has been completed any
holes cut or breakages made in the finished surfaces shall be properly
repaired and the disfigured areas shall be then painted over or otherwise
resurfaced to match the existing finish. Any abrasion or disfigurement of the
finished work or of any portion of the building where such abrasion or
disfigurement is caused by the activities of this work shall be repaired and
neatly finished to match the adjacent work. Upon completion of the work
waste material and debris shall be removed and legally disposed of off the
site.
3.05
A.
Fit all doors and install proper hardware. Fitting of doors and frames shall be
done carefully and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
B.
All hardware shall be accurately and securely installed and all mortising and
sinkage required to receive the hardware, shall be neatly made. Door knobs
and handles shall be protected by a wrapping of tough paper or cloth until
Final Completion of the Project.
C.
The requirements for the location of locks and latches should be coordinated
with the location of strikes on frames.
3.06
CLEANING
A.
Daily clean work areas by sweeping and disposing of debris, scraps, and
deposits of compound, etc.
B.
After completion of the work of this section, remove equipment, and clean all
wall, partition, and floor areas free from deposits of materials installed under
this Section.
3.07
PROTECTION
A.
__________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/10615-5
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
Flexible Hose.
2.
3.
5.
Soap Tray
6.
Soap Dispensers.
7.
Grab Bars.
8.
Framed Mirrors.
Notes: For the exact requirement of work refer to Drawing and BOQ
1.02
1.
Sanitary Fixtures
2.
Toilet Partitions.
3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of referenced standards
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities
having jurisdiction. Whenever a conflict arises, consult the Engineer as to
which requirements shall apply.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
2.
3.
4.
Or approved equal.
B. Toilet room accessories provided for the project shall be by one of the above
manufacturers, except where other specific products are indicated under
Accessories.
C. No stamped, printed, or other manufacturer identification shall appear on the
exposed surfaces of accessories furnished under this section.
2.02
MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: When used for metal accessories and shall be AISI Type 302
or 304. Exposed surfaces of stainless steel shall receive a No.4 satin finish as
approved by the Engineer.
B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525.
C. Chrome Plating: When specified shall be applied over a coating of nickel. On
steel, the nickel coating shall be applied over a coating of copper. Chrome
plated surfaces shall receive a US26D finish, as approved by the Engineer.
Note that die-cast base metal is not acceptable.
_____________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10800-2
Toilet & Bath Accessories
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
2.03
B.
For location of the following Toilet Accessories, refer wet area details in
Architectural Drawings.
C.
The required toilet accessories shall be as per drawings and BOQ. The
following accessories from the particular manufacturer are provided herewith
to provide as a guideline and as minimum requirement in the contract. The
final selection shall be as per Engineers choice and approval.
_____________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10800-3
Toilet & Bath Accessories
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
Bobrick
Model
2B
Item
0B
Description
1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
B-165-Series
---------4B
B-8225
B-4388
B-526
B-669
3B
B-6806
B-682
See manufacturer
specifications.
B-673
Remark
For
required
size,
refer
architectural drawings.
For
required
size,
refer
architectural drawings.
See manufacturer technical
specifications.
See manufacturer technical
specifications.
See manufacturer technical
specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
PREPARATION
_____________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10800-4
Toilet & Bath Accessories
technical
( )
______________________________________________________________________________________
3.03
INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall suitably protect the work in order to maintain finishes in
perfect condition until final completion and acceptance. Any damaged or
defective work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the
Engineer.
B. The finished installation shall be sound and free from defects of materials and
workmanship. After the inspection of the installation and its approval by the
Engineer, protection, labels, smears and stains shall be removed and mirror
shall be washed clean.
END OF SECTION
_____________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center III-2/10800-5
Toilet & Bath Accessories
( )
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 11150
BARRIER GATE
1.
CABINET
The cabinet enclosure is fabricated from 12 gauge steel, dichromate-plated
throughout to maintain a long-lasting, weather-tight, rust-resistant service life. All
structural seams and corners are welded to assure structural integrity. The main
shaft is centered within the cabinet by self-lubricating bushings. Access to the inside
is provided by a single gasket door with a flush-mounted T-handle lock assembly.
Four mounting holes at the bottom of the AG50 cabinet provide a secure installation
platform.
The entire cabinet has an electrostatically applied polyester powder finish with a preengineered texture on the outside. The polyester powder finish is baked on at an
extremely high temperature which provides abrasion resistance. It has highly rated
UV protection, and is resistant to acids, alkali solvents and salt, which will provide an
attractive maintenance free appearance for many years. The standard cabinet
color is white, and optional colors are available.
2.
GATE ARM
The gate arm is constructed of 1" x 4" x 20' clear white pine. The exterior finish is an
exterior painted enamel with a safety warning sticker attached to the gate arm.
3.
ELECTRICAL OPERATION
The Auto Gate is equipped with logic controls and operational controls. The logic
controls are provided in a factory-sealed enclosure. The operational controls, which
are a relay logic design, incorporate a plug-in-style wiring harness to the connection
box, for easy field service and/or lane modifications. Gate arm travel is controlled by
a limit switch and cam assemblies. Brake devices are not necessary. The
galvanized connections box contains heavy-duty toggle switches to activate power to
the terminal strip, heat controls, and automatic or manual operations. Convenience
outlet is incorporated within the connections box to make field service easier.
Thermal-overload protection is provided within the motor design, and can be reset by
a push button located on the motor housing.
Weight
Kg
72
Voltage
Motor
Current
V A,C,
V
D,C,
230V
24V
230
24
1,3 max
15 max
Motor
Power
W
300
Duty
Reduction Torque Opening
cycle %
ratio
N.m
time s
Intensive
use
1/202
600
4-8
END OF SECTION
______________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
II-2/11150-1
BARRIER GATE
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
SECTION 12357
KITCHEN CABINETS
PART 1. GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 06150 Wood Floor.
2. Division 15 - Plumbing utilities and fixtures.
1.02
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
E.
F.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 1
KITCHEN CABINETS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
G.
H.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
D.
Samples:
1. Submit two, 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating cabinet finish.
2. Submit two, 300 x 300 mm size samples, illustrating counter top finish
and edge.
3. Submit two samples of drawer pulls and hinges, illustrating hardware
finish.
E.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
1.06
MOCKUP
A.
B.
C.
D.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 2
KITCHEN CABINETS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
1.07
PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
B.
1.08
A.
B.
B.
1.10
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01
KITCHEN/CUSTOM CABINETS
A.
Fabricators:
1.
Alno Mobelwerke GMBH & Co. KG
7798 Pfullendorf, P.O. Box 1160
Germany, Tel: 07552-21-0
2.
3.
Siematic Limited
11-17 Fowler Road, II ford
Essex 166 3 UU
Great Britain
4.
Approved Equal
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 3
KITCHEN CABINETS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.02
COMPONENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.03
ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Plastic Edge Trim: Extruded convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking
Serrated tongue; of width to match component thickness; color as
selected.
C.
D.
Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit
application.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped pull, steel with epoxy powder-coated
finish, 100 mm centers.
I.
Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys for each lock, master keyed,
steel with satin finish.
J.
Catches: Magnetic.
K.
L.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 4
KITCHEN CABINETS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
B.
Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with plastic edging. Use one
piece for full length only.
C.
D.
E.
When necessary to cut and fit on site, fabricate materials with ample
allowance for cutting. Furnish trim for scribing and site cutting.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Fabricate cabinets and counter tops with cutouts for plumbing fixtures,
inserts and outlet boxes. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site
dimensions. Seal cut edges.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
C.
Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this
section.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 5
KITCHEN CABINETS
( )
_______________________________________________________________________________
3.02
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units
and counter tops.
D.
E.
Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and
anchorages.
F.
3.03
ADJUSTING
A.
B.
3.04
CLEANING
A.
B.
____________________________________________________________________________________
Taher Consultant Engineering Center
III-2/12357- 6
KITCHEN CABINETS